SIMATIC LOGO! Manual - Service, Support

SIMATIC LOGO! Manual - Service, Support
Manual Edition 06/2003
LOGO!
The following supplement is part of this documentation:
No.
Designation
Drawing number
Edition
1
Product information
A5E00324307-01
07/2004
4 019169 120982
@[email protected]
1P
6ED1050-1AA00-0BE5
Siemens AG
Bereich Automation and Drives
Geschäftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems
Postfach 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg
Copyright: © Siemens AG 2001 - 2003
Subject to change without prior notice
www.siemens.com/logo/
6ED1050-1AA00-0BE5
Preface
Dear customer
We thank you for purchasing LOGO! and congratulate you on
your decision. With LOGO! you have acquired a logic module that
meets the stringent quality requirements of ISO 9001.
LOGO! can be used in many fields of applications. Due to its high
functionality and yet easy operation the LOGO! offers you highly
efficient economies for almost any application.
Purpose of this manual
This LOGO! manual provides you with information about the creation of circuit programs, about the installation and use of LOGO!
0BA4 devices and expansion modules, and about their compatibility to the previous 0BA0-0BA3 versions (0BAx are the last four
characters of the order number and differentiate the device series).
LOGO!’s place in information technology
The wiring information in your LOGO! manualis also found in the
LOGO! Product Info included with all devices. For further information on programming the LOGO! on your PC, with the PC in the
Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
LOGO!Soft Comfort is the programming software for PCs. It runs
under Windows, Linux, Mac OS X and helps you to get started with LOGO! and to write, test, print out and archive your programs, independent of the LOGO! .
Guide
We have divided this manual into 9 chapters:
Getting started with LOGO!
LOGO! installation and wiring
Programming LOGO!
LOGO! functions
Configuring LOGO!
LOGO! program module (card)
LOGO! software
Applications
Appendix
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
i
Preface
Valid range of this manual
The manual applies to devices of the series 0BA4.
Changes compared to previous releases of the manual
LOGO! 24o was added.
The digital module LOGO! DM 8 24R was added.
The analog module LOGO! AM 2 PT100 was added.
Description of changes and new features of the series 0BA4
devices.
Main differences compared to previous devices (0BA0 to 0BA3)
Higher performance: faster execution times
New program module (card) with more memory and know-how
protection, selectable at the parameters.
Display with background lighting and 4 x 12 characters.
New features of the current devices (0BA4)
You have 130 blocks available for creating the circuit program.
You can select retentivity also for time functions.
You can use the LOGO! cursor keys as inputs.
You can use the special functions “Shift register”, “Analog amplifier”, “Analog value monitoring” and “Analog differential
trigger”.
You can invert individual inputs.
Six of the basic functions are expanded with four inputs.
You can test your circuit program online using the PC.
Parameters for certain functions can also be derived from analog values and counter values.
Counter: You can also use fast inputs (I5, I6).
Additional support
At our Internet address
http://www.siemens.com/logo
you can quickly and easily find answers to your queries about
LOGO!.
You can reach Technical Support under:
Phone:
+49 (0)180 5050-222
Fax:
+49 (0)180 5050-223
E-Mail:
[email protected]
ii
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Preface
Safety guidelines
The notes in this user manual are for your own personal safety
and for preventing damage to assets. You should read them carefully and follow the instructions they give you. These notes are
highlighted with a warning triangle and are shown according to the
degree of hazard as follows:
!
Danger
Warns that death, serious harm to health or damage to assets will result if
the respective precautionary measures are not taken.
!
Warning
Warns that death, serious harm to health or damage to can result if the
respective precautionary measures are not taken.
!
Caution
Warns that harm to health or damage to assets can result if the respective
precautionary measures are not taken.
Caution
Means that material damage may occur if corresponding safety measures
are not taken.
Note
Draws your attention to particularly important information relating to the
product and its handling, or to a part of the documentation requiring your
special attention.
Qualified personnel
Only skilled personnel should be allowed to start and operate
this device. Qualified personnel in the sense of the information on
safety technology in this manual are persons who are authorized
to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment and systems in accordance with safety regulations and standards.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
iii
Preface
Use as intended
Please note:
!
Warning
This device must always be used as intended for the applications described in the catalog and in the technical specifications, and only in combination with third-party devices or components approved or recommended by Siemens.
Prerequisite for the safe and proper operation of the product is its proper
transportation, storage, installation and mounting, and careful operator
control and maintenance.
Trademarks
LOGO! is a trademark of SIEMENS AG .
Other designations in this documentation may represent trademarks, whose
use by third parties for their own purpose my infringe the right of the owner.
Copyright Siemens AG 1996 to 2003 All rights reserved
The reproduction, distribution or use of this document or its contents is not
permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for
damages. All rights reserved, especially for the granting of patents or GM
entries.
Disclaimer of liability
We have examined the contents of this publication for agreement with the
hardware and software described. Nevertheless, discrepancies can not be
ruled out. Any liability and warranty for the accuracy of this information is
excluded. The data in this manual are reviewed at regular intervals. Any
corrections required are included in the subsequent editions. Suggestions
for improvement are welcomed.
iv
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
1
Getting started with LOGO! . . . . . . .
1
2
LOGO! installation and wiring . . . . .
11
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
Setup of the modular LOGO! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup with different voltage classes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing/removing LOGO! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIN rail mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wall-mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring the LOGO! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting LOGO! inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching on the LOGO!/Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
13
14
16
17
21
23
23
25
31
33
3
Programming LOGO! . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
3.1
3.2
3.3
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blocks and block numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The way to LOGO!, starting with the
circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The 4 Golden rules for the operation of LOGO! . .
Overview of the LOGO! menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing and starting the circuit program . . . . . . . . .
Select programming mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The first circuit program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit program input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning a circuit program name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching LOGO! to RUN mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second circuit program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
42
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.6.7
3.6.8
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
45
48
50
51
51
53
54
60
61
66
68
74
v
Contents
3.6.9 Deleting block groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.10 Correcting typing errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.11 Deleting the circuit program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.12 Summertime/wintertime conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.13 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Memory space and circuit dimensions . . . . . . . . . .
4
75
76
77
78
83
84
LOGO! functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
4.1 Constants and connectors – Co . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Basic functions list – GF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 AND (AND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 AND with edge evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 NAND (NOT AND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4 NAND with edge evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.5 OR (OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.6 NOR (NOT OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7 XOR (exclusive OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8 NOT (Negation, Inverter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Basics on special functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 Designation of the inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 Time response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3 Backup of the real-time clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4 Retentivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.5 Parameter protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.6 Calculating the gain and offset of analog values . .
4.4 Special functions list – SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 On-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Off-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 On-/Off-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Retentive on-delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.5 Wiping relay (pulse output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.6 Edge triggered wiping relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.7 Asynchronous pulse generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.8 Random generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.9 Stairway lighting switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.10 Multiple function switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.11 Weekly timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.12 Yearly timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.13 Up/down counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
93
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
101
102
103
104
105
105
106
106
109
113
117
119
121
123
125
128
130
132
135
138
143
146
vi
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Contents
4.4.14
4.4.15
4.4.16
4.4.17
4.4.18
4.4.19
4.4.20
4.4.21
4.4.22
4.4.23
4.4.24
4.4.25
Hours counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Threshold trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog threshold trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog differential trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog value monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Latching relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
155
158
161
165
170
173
175
176
179
186
190
Configuring LOGO! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193
5.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2 Selecting the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3 Modifying parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Setting the time-of-day and date
(LOGO! ... C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
196
197
198
5
201
6
LOGO! program module (card) . . . .
203
6.1
6.2
Security function (CopyProtect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting and removing
the program module (card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying data from the LOGO!
to the program module (card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying data from the program module (card)
to LOGO! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
212
7
LOGO! Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
7.1
Connecting the LOGO! to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218
6.3
6.4
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
208
210
vii
Contents
8
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.5
Stairway or corridor lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements for a stairway lighting system . . . . . .
Previous solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting system with LOGO! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special features and expansion options . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements of an automatic door . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventional solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door control system with LOGO! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special features and expansion options . . . . . . . . . .
Extended solution with LOGO! 230RC . . . . . . . . . . .
Air-conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements for an air-conditioning System . . . . .
Advantages of using LOGO! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements for a gate control system . . . . . . . . . .
Previous solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended LOGO! solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centralized control and monitoring
of several factory doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements for a gate control system . . . . . . . . . .
Luminous rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements for a lighting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Previous solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luminous row control system with LOGO! 230RC .
Service water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements for a control system
of a service water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Previous solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service water pump system with LOGO! 230RC . .
Special features and expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further fields of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
223
223
224
226
227
227
228
228
231
231
234
234
237
239
239
240
242
8.5.1
8.6
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.7
8.7.1
8.7.2
8.7.3
8.7.4
8.8
viii
243
244
247
247
248
249
251
252
252
253
254
255
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Contents
Appendix
A
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
259
General technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data: LOGO! 230...
and LOGO! DM8 230R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3 Technical data: LOGO! 24... and
LOGO! DM8 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4 Technical data: LOGO! 24RC...
and LOGO! DM8 24 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.5 Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... and
LOGO! DM8 12/24R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.6 Switching capacity and service life
of the relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.7 Technical data: LOGO! AM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.8 Technical data: LOGO! AM 2 PT100 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.9 Technical data: LOGO!Power 12 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.10 Technical data: LOGO!Power 24 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.11 Technical data: LOGO! Contact 24/230 . . . . . . . . . .
259
A.1
A.2
261
264
267
270
273
274
275
277
279
281
B
Determining the cycle time . . . . . . . .
283
C
LOGO! without display . . . . . . . . . . .
285
D
LOGO! menu structure . . . . . . . . . . .
289
E
Order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
291
F
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
ix
Contents
x
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
1 Getting started with LOGO!
Here’s LOGO!
LOGO! is a universal logic module made by Siemens.
LOGO! integrates
Controls
Operator and display panel with background lighting
Power supply
Interface for expansion modules
Interface for the program module (card) and a PC cable
Pre-configured standard functions, e.g. on- and
off-delays, pulse relay and softkey
Timer
Digital and analog flags
Inputs and outputs, according to the device type.
What LOGO! can do for you
LOGO! offers solutions for domestic and installation engineering (e.g. for stairway lighting, external lighting, sun
blinds, shutters, shop window lighting etc.), switch cabinet
engineering, as well as for mechanical and apparatus engineering (e.g. for gate control systems, air-conditioning systems, or rainwater pumps etc.).
LOGO! can also be implemented for special control systems in conservatories or greenhouses, for control signal
processing and, by connecting a communication module
(e.g. ASi) for distributed local controlling of machines and
processes.
Special versions without operator panel and display unit
are available for series production applications in small machine, apparatus, switching cabinet and installation engineering.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
1
Getting started with LOGO!
Which devices are available?
LOGO! Basic is available in two voltage classes:
Class 1 24 V, i.e. 12 V DC, 24 V DC, 24 V AC
Class 2 > 24 V, i.e. 115...240 V AC/DC,
in the versions:
With display: 8 inputs and 4 outputs.
Without display (”LOGO! Pure”): 8 inputs and 4 outputs.
Each version is integrated into 4 subunits (SU), is equipped
with an expansion interface and provides 33 pre-configured
standard and special function blocks for the creation of
your circuit program.
Which expansion modules are available?
LOGO! digital modules are available for operation with
12 V DC, 24 V AC/DC and 115...240 V AC/DC, and are
equipped with four inputs and four outputs.
LOGO! analog modules are available for operation with
12 V DC and 24 V DC, and are equipped with two analog inputs or two Pt100 inputs.
LOGO! communications modules (CM), for example the
communications module AS interface, that is described
in a separate documentation.
The digital/analog modules are integrated in two subunits.
Each one is equipped with two expansion interfaces for
connecting additional modules.
Devices no longer available
All versions with 6 inputs.
A long variant with 12 inputs and 8 outputs
The bus version with 12 inputs and 8 outputs.
The modular features of LOGO! replace this type of equipment.
It’s your choice
The various LOGO! Basic versions and expansion modules
offer you a highly flexible and adaptive system to suit your
specific tasks.
2
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Getting started with LOGO!
The LOGO! system offers you many solutions such as for
small domestic installations, simple automation tasks, and
even complex engineering tasks involving its integration
into a bus system (e.g. communications module AS interface).
Note
LOGO! Basic may only be equipped with expansion modules of the same voltage class. Mechanical encoding pins
in the housing prevent you from connecting devices of a
different voltage class.
Exception: The left-hand interface of an analog module or
communication module is galvanically isolated.
This type of expansion module can therefore be connected
to devices of a different voltage class.
See also Chapter 2.1.
Each LOGO! Basic provides the following connections for
the creation of the circuit program, regardless of the number of connected modules:
Digital inputs I1 to I24
Analog inputs AI1 to AI8
Digital outputs Q1 to Q16
Analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2
Digital flag blocks M1 to M24, M8: Startup flag
Analog flag blocks AM1 to AM6
Shift register bits S1 to S8
4 cursor keys
16 blank outputs X1 to X16.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
3
Getting started with LOGO!
The LOGO! structure
2
10
LOGO! Basic (e.g.: 230 RC)
1
8
I1 I2 I3 I4
I5 I6 I7 I8
4
L1 N
4
90
35
6
5
1
Q1
2
1
Q2
2
1
2
Q3
1
2
Q4
3
72
55
2
9
8
10
1
8
4
L1 N I1 I2 I3 I4
11
(e.g.: DM8 230R)
RUN/STOP
1
Q1
2 1
1 Q3 2
Q2
90
7
35
LOGO! expansion module
9
2
1 Q42
3
36
1
Power supply
2
Inputs
3
Outputs
4
Module slot with cap
4
53
5
Control panel
(not for RCo)
8
Expansion interface
6
LCD
(not for RCo)
9
Mechanical coding
pins
7
RUN/STOP indicator
10
Mechanical coding
sockets
11
Slide
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Getting started with LOGO!
LOGO! Basic (e.g.: 12/24 RC)
2
10
1
8
4
L+ M I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
4
90
35
6
5
1
Q1
2
1
Q2
2
1
2
Q3
1
2
Q4
3
72
55
2
8
10
1
9
8
4
L+ M I1 I2 I3 I4
(e.g.: DM8 12/24R)
11
7
1
90
RUN/STOP
35
LOGO! expansion module
9
2 1
2
Q1
Q2
1 Q3 2
1 Q42
3
53
36
1
Power supply
2
Inputs
3
Outputs
4
Module slot with cap
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
5
Control panel
(not for RCo)
8
Expansion interface
6
LCD
(not for RCo)
9
Mechanical coding
pins
7
RUN/STOP indicator
10
Mechanical coding
sockets
11
Slide
5
Getting started with LOGO!
LOGO! AM 2
9
10
1
9
8
L+ M
4
L+ M
8
11
90
RUN/STOP
35
7
12
PE
INPUT2x(0..10V/0..20mA)
I1 M1 U1 I2 M2 U2
2
53
36
1
Power supply
2
Inputs
7
RUN/STOP indicator
8
Expansion interface
9
Mechanical coding
pins
10
Mechanical coding
sockets
11
12
PE terminal, for connecting earth and the
shielding of analog
measuring cables.
Slide
LOGO! AM 2 PT100
10
9
1
9
8
L+ M
4
L+ M
8
11
90
RUN/STOP
1
35
7
12
PE
M1+ IC1 M1- M2+IC2 M2-
2
53
36
6
1
Power supply
2
Inputs
7
RUN/STOP indicator
8
Expansion interface
9
Mechanical coding
pins
10
Mechanical coding
sockets
11
12
PE terminal, for connecting earth and the
shielding of analog
measuring cables.
Slide
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Getting started with LOGO!
How to identify the LOGO!
The LOGO! identifier informs you of various properties:
12: 12 V DC version
24: 24 V DC version
230: 115...240 V AC version
R: Relay outputs (without R: solid-state outputs)
C: Integrated Weekly timer
o: Version without display (“LOGO! Pure”)
DM: Digital module
AM: Analog module
CM: Communications module (e.g. AS interface)
Symbols
Version with display unit is equipped with 8 inputs and
4 outputs
Version without display unit is equipped with 8 inputs and
4 outputs
The digital module is equipped with 4 digital inputs and
4 digital outputs
The analog module is equipped with 2 analog inputs
The communications module (CM) is equipped with
4 virtual inputs and 4 virtual outputs (e.g. AS interface)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
7
Getting started with LOGO!
Versions
The following LOGO! versions are available:
Symbol
Designation
LOGO! 12/24 RC
LOGO! 24
Supply
voltage
Inputs
12/24 V
DC
8 digital
24 V DC
8 digital
(1)
(1)
Outputs
Properties
4 relays
(10 A)
4 solid
state
24V / 0.3A
no clock
LOGO! 24RC (3)
24 V AC/
24 V DC
8 digital
4 relays
(10A)
LOGO! 230RC (2)
115...240 V
AC/DC
8 digital
4 relays
(10A)
LOGO! 12/24RCo
12/24 V
DC
8 digital
4 relays
(10A)
no display unit
24 V DC
8 digital
4 solid
state
24 V / 0.3A
no display unit
4 relays
(10A)
no display unit
4 relays
(10A)
no display unit
LOGO! 24o
(1)
(1)
LOGO! 24RCo
(3)
LOGO! 230RCo (2)
24 V AC /
24 V DC
8 digital
115...240 V
AC/DC
8 digital
no keyboard
no keyboard
no clock
no keyboard
no keyboard
(1): Of those can be used alternatively: 2 analog inputs (0 ... 10V) and 2 fast
inputs.
(2): 230 V AC versions: Two groups consisting of 4 inputs each. Each group
must be connected to the same phase. It is possible to interconnect groups with
a different phase.
(3): The digital inputs can be operated with P or N action.
8
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Getting started with LOGO!
Expansion modules
The following expansion modules can be connected to the
LOGO!:
Symbol
Name
Power supply
Inputs
Outputs
LOGO! DM 8 12/24R
12/24 V DC
4 digital
4 relays (5A)
LOGO! DM 8 24
24 V DC
4 digital
4 solid state
24 V / 0.3 A
LOGO! DM 8 24R (3)
24 V AC/DC
4 digital
4 relays (5A)
LOGO! DM 8 230 R
115...240 V AC/DC
4 digital (1)
4 relays (5A)
LOGO! AM 2
12/24 V DC
2 analog
0 ... 10 V or 0
... 20 mA (2)
none
LOGO! AM 2 PT100
12/24 V DC
2 Pt100
–50 °C to
+200 °C
none
(1): Different phases are not allowed within the inputs.
(2): 0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA can be connected optionally.
(3): Digital inputs can be operated either with P or with N action.
Certification and approvals
LOGO! is certified to cULus and FM.
cULus Haz. Loc.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) to
– UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
– CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
– UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
– CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
FM Approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) to
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
9
Getting started with LOGO!
Note
You will find current approvals on the rating plate of the
relevant module.
!
Warning
Risk of personal injury and material damage.
In potentially explosive atmospheres, there is a risk of personal injury or damage to material if you disconnect connectors when the system is in RUN.
In potentially explosive atmospheres, always switch off the
power supply to LOGO! and its components before you
disconnect any connectors.
LOGO! is issued with the CE Certificate of Conformity. It is
compliant with VDE 0631 and IEC 61131-2 and interference-proof to EN 55011, Limit Class B.
Marine certification has been requested.
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
BV (Bureau Veritas)
DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
LOGO! is therefore suitable for use both in industry and in
the domestic area.
ID for Australia
Our products carrying the label shown at the side are compliant with AS/NZS 2064:1997 (Class A) standard.
Recycling and Disposal
LOGO! units can be fully recycled, due to their low-pollutant
equipment. Contact a certified electronic waste disposal
center for environmentally acceptable recycling and disposal of your old devices.
10
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
2 LOGO! installation and wiring
General guidelines
Please note the following guidelines for the installation and
wiring of your LOGO! :
Always ensure that the wiring of your LOGO! is compliant with current rules and standards. Also, conform
with all national and regional regulations when you
install and operate the devices. For information on standards and regulations that apply to your specific case,
contact your local authorities.
Always use cables with an appropriate conductor crosssections for the relevant current. You can wire the
LOGO! with cable conductor cross-sections from
1.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2; see Chapter 2.3.
Do not exceed the screw torque of the terminals. The
maximum torque is: 0.5 N/m, see Chapter 2.3.
Keep the cabling as short as possible. If longer cables
are necessary, you should use shielded versions. You
should always route your cables in pairs: i.e. one neutral
conductor plus one phase conductor or signal line.
Always keep separate:
– The AC wiring
– High-voltage DC circuits with high-frequency switching cycles
– Low-voltage signal wiring.
Ensure that the wires are installed with an appropriate
strain relief.
Provide a suitable lightning surge arrester for cables
installed in relevant areas of hazard.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
11
LOGO! installation and wiring
Do not connect an external power supply in parallel to
the output load of a DC output. This could develop a
reverse current at the output if you have not installed a
diode or similar barrier device.
Note
LOGO! units may only be installed and wired by skilled
personnel who know and follow the general engineering
rules and the relevant regulations and standards.
12
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
2.1 Setup of the modular LOGO!
2.1.1 Maximum setup
Maximum setup of a LOGO! with analog inputs
(LOGO! 12/24 RC/RCo and LOGO! 24/24o)
LOGO! Basic, 4 digital modules and 3 analog modules
I1......I6, I7, I8
AI1, AI2
LOGO! Basic
Q1...Q4
I9...I12
I13...I16 I17...I20
I21...I24
AI3, AI4 AI5, AI6 AI7, AI8
LOGO! LOGO! LOGO!
DM 8 DM 8 DM 8
LOGO! LOGO! LOGO! LOGO!
DM 8 AM 2
AM 2
AM 2
Q5...Q8 Q9...Q12 Q13...Q16
Maximum setup of a LOGO! without analog inputs
(LOGO! 24 RC/RCo and LOGO! 230 RC/RCo)
LOGO! Basic, 4 digital modules and 4 analog modules
I1 . . . . . . . . . . . I8
I9...I12
I13...I16 I17...I20 I21...I24
AI1 , AI2 AI3, AI4 AI5, AI6 AI7, AI8
LOGO! Basic
Q1...Q4
LOGO! LOGO! LOGO! LOGO! LOGO! LOGO! LOGO! LOGO!
DM 8 DM 8 DM 8 DM 8 AM 2
AM 2
AM 2
AM 2
Q5...Q8 Q9...Q12
Q13...
Q16
High-speed/optimal communication performance
For optimal and high-speed communication performance
between LOGO! Basic and the various modules, we recommend you install the “digital modules first, then the analog
modules” (example above).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
13
LOGO! installation and wiring
2.1.2 Setup with different voltage classes
Rules
Digital modules can only be connected to devices of the
same voltage class.
You may connect analog and communications modules to
devices of any voltage class.
Overview:
Connecting an expansion module to LOGO! Basic
LOGO!
B i
Basic
Expansion modules
DM 8
DM 8
DM 8
DM 8
AM2/
12/24R
24
24R
230R
AM2
CM
PT100
LOGO! 12/24 RC
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24 RC
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 230 RC
–
–
–
x
x
x
LOGO! 12/24RCo
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24o
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24 RCo
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 230 RCo
–
–
–
x
x
x
14
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
Overview:
Connecting a further expansion module to an expansion
module
Expansion
module
d l
Further expansion modules
DM 8
DM 8
DM 8
DM 8
AM2/
12/24R
24
24R
230R
AM2
CM
PT100
DM 8 12/24 R
x
x
x
–
x
x
DM 8 24
x
x
x
–
x
x
DM 8 24 R
x
x
x
–
x
x
DM 8 230 R
–
–
–
x
x
x
AM2 / AM2 PT100
x
x
x
–
x
x
CM AS interface
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
15
LOGO! installation and wiring
2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!
Dimensions
The LOGO! installation dimensions are compliant with
DIN 43880.
LOGO! can be snap-mounted to 35 mm DIN rails to
EN 50022 or on the wall.
LOGO! width:
LOGO! Basic has a width of 72 mm, which corresponds
with 4 subunits.
LOGO! expansion modules have a width of 36 mm,
which corresponds with 2 subunits.
Note
The figure below shows you an example of the installation
and removal of a LOGO! 230 RC and a digital module.
The measures shown apply to all other LOGO! Basic versions and expansion modules.
!
16
Warning
Always switch off power before you “remove” and “insert”
an expansion module.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
2.2.1 DIN rail mounting
Mounting
How to mount a LOGO! Basic and a digital module onto a
DIN rail:
LOGO! Basic:
1. Hook the LOGO! Basic module onto the rail and
2. then push down the lower end to snap it on. The mounting interlock at the rear must engage
6
1
3
5
2
4
LOGO! digital module:
3. On the right side of the LOGO! Basic/LOGO! expansion
module, remove the connector cap
4. Place the digital module onto the DIN rail on the righthand side of the LOGO! Basic
5. Slide the digital module towards the left until it contacts
the LOGO! Basic
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
17
LOGO! installation and wiring
6. Using a screwdriver, push the interlock to the left. In its
end position the slide interlock engages in the LOGO!
Basic.
Repeat steps 3 through 6 to mount further expansion modules.
Note
The expansion interface on the last expansion module
must be covered.
18
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
Removal
To remove the LOGO!:
....... if you have installed only one LOGO! Basic:
Part A
1. Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the
slide interlock and move the latch downward
2. Swing the LOGO! Basic off the DIN rail.
1
2
2
4
1
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
3
A
B
19
LOGO! installation and wiring
....... if you have connected at least one expansion module to the LOGO! Basic:
Part B
1. Using a screwdriver, push the integrate slide interlock
to the right
2. Slide the expansion module off towards the right
3. Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the
slide interlock and lever it downward
4. Swing the expansion module off the profile rail.
Repeat steps 1 to 4 for all other expansion modules.
Note
If you have connected more than one expansion module, it
is advisable to start removal with the last module at the
right-hand side.
Make sure that the slide interlock of the module to be
installed/removed is not engaged in the next module.
20
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
2.2.2 Wall-mounting
For wall-mounting, first slide the mounting slides on the
rear side of the devices towards the outside. You can now
wall-mount the LOGO! by means of two mounting slides
and two M4 screws (tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 N/m).
Mounting slides
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
21
LOGO! installation and wiring
Drilling template for wall-mounting
Before you can wall-mount the LOGO!, you need to drill
holes using the template shown below.
35.5 +/– 0.2
98 +/– 0.3
53.5 +/– 0.2
1
2
2
2
n x 35.5 +/– 0.2
All dimensions in mm
Bore hole for M4 screw
Tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 N/m
1 LOGO! Basic
LOGO! expansion module
2
22
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring the LOGO!
Wire the LOGO! using a screwdriver with a 3-mm blade.
You do not need wire ferrules for the terminals. Permitted
conductor cross-sections:
1 x 2.5 mm2
2 x 1.5 mm2 for each second terminal chamber
Tightening torque: 0.4...0.5 N/m or 3...4 lbs/in
Note
Always cover the terminals after you have completed the
installation. To protect LOGO! adequately from impermissible contact to live parts, local standards must be complied
with.
2.3.1 Connecting the power supply
The 230-V versions of LOGO! are suitable for operation
with rated voltages of 115 V AC/DC and 240 V AC/DC. The
LOGO! 24-V and 12-V versions can be operated with a
24 VDC, 24 V AC or 12 VDC power supply. For information
on permissible voltage tolerances, line frequencies and
power consumption, refer to the installation instructions in
the Product Information supplied with your device and to
the technical data in Appendix A.
Note
A power failure may cause an additional edge triggering
signal at the special functions, for example.
Data of the last uninterrupted cycle are stored in LOGO!.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
23
LOGO! installation and wiring
Connecting LOGO!
To connect LOGO! to the power supply:
LOGO! .....
with AC power supply
LOGO! .....
with DC power supply
L+
M
L1
N
L+
M
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
Protection with safety fuse
if required (recommended) for:
12/24 RC...:
0.8 A
24:
2.0 A
L1
N
I1
I2
I3
I4
To suppress surge voltages,
install varistors (MOV) with an
operating voltage at least 20 %
above the rated voltage.
Note
LOGO! is a double-insulated switchgear. It is not required
to connect an equipment grounding conductor.
Circuit protection with AC voltage
To suppress voltage peaks on the power supply lines, you
can install a metal oxide varistor (MOV) (MOV). Make sure
that the operating voltage of the varistor (MOV) used lies at
least 20 % above the rated voltage (for example S10K275).
24
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3.2 Connecting LOGO! inputs
Requirements
At the inputs you connect sensor elements such as: momentary switches, switches, light barriers, daylight control
switches etc.
Sensor characteristics for LOGO!
LOGO! 12/24 RC/RCo
LOGO! DM8 12/24 R
I1 ... I6
I7, I8
LOGO! 24/24o
LOGO! DM8 24
I1 ... I6
I7, I8
Signal status 0
< 5 VDC
< 5 VDC
< 5 VDC
< 5 VDC
Input current
< 1.0 mA
< 0.05 mA
< 1.0 mA
< 0.05 mA
Signal status 1
> 8 V DC
> 8 V DC
> 8 V DC
> 8 V DC
Input current
> 1.5 mA
> 0.1 mA
> 1.5 mA
> 0.1 mA
LOGO! 24
RC/RCo (AC)
LOGO! DM8
24 R (AC)
LOGO! 24
RC/RCo (DC)
LOGO! DM8
24 R (DC)
LOGO! 230
RC/RCo (AC)
LOGO! DM8
230 R (AC)
LOGO! 230
RC/RCo (DC)
LOGO! DM8
230 R (DC)
Signal status 0
< 5 V AC
< 5 V DC
< 40 V AC
< 30 V DC
Input current
< 1.0 mA
< 1.0 mA
< 003 mA
< 003 mA
Signal status 1
> 12 V AC
> 12 V DC
> 79 V AC
> 79 V DC
Input current
> 2.5 mA
> 2.5 mA
> 0.08 mA
> 0.08 mA
Note
The digital inputs of LOGO! 230 RC/RCo are divided into
two groups, each consisting of four inputs. Within the
same group, all inputs must be operated on the same
phase. Different phases are only possible between the
groups.
Example: I1 to I4 on phase L1, I5 to I8 on phase L2.
Inputs within the LOGO! DM8 230R may not be connected
to different phases.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
25
LOGO! installation and wiring
Sensor connections
Connecting glow lamps and 2-wire proximity switches
(Bero) to LOGO! 230 RC/230 RCo or LOGO!
DM8 230 R (AC)
L1
N
Order number for C:
Siemens
Switchgear & Systems
C
L1
3SB1420-3D
N
X-capacitor 2.5 kV, 100 nF
Take the quiescent current of any 2-wire proximity switches
used into account. The level of the quiescent current of
some 2-wire proximity switches is high enough to trigger a
logical ”1” signal at the LOGO! input. You should therefore
compare the quiescent current of the proximity switches
with the technical data of inputs Appendix A.
26
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
Restrictions
Signal status transitions 0 1 / 1 0
After a 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 transition, the signal must remain
constant at the input at least for the duration of one program cycle, so that LOGO! can detect the new signal status.
The program execution time is determined by the size of
the circuit program. Appendix B contains a benchmark test
routine that you can use to determine the current scan
cycle time.
Special features of LOGO! 12/24 RC/RCo and LOGO! 24/24o
High-speed inputs: I5 and I6
These versions are also equipped with high-speed counting
inputs (Up/down counters, Threshold triggers). The restrictions mentioned earlier do not apply to these high-speed
inputs.
Note
The high-speed inputs I5 and I6 are the same as in the
previous versions 0BA0 to 0BA3, i.e. a circuit program
that is written in these versions can be transferred to the
new 0BA4 units by means of the programming software
LOGO! SoftComfort, without any changes to these features. In contrast to this, you need to modify circuit programs written for a LOGO!...L version (high-speed inputs
I11/I12).
Expansion modules do not have high-speed inputs.
Analog inputs: I7 and I8
The inputs I7 and I8 of LOGO! versions 12/24RC/RCo and
24/24o can be used both as standard digital inputs and as
analog inputs. The input mode is defined in the LOGO! circuit program.
The inputs I7 / I8 provide digital functions, and the inputs
AI1 and AI2 provide analog functions.
See also Chapter 4.1.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
27
LOGO! installation and wiring
Note
The LOGO! AM 2 expansion module provides further analog inputs. The LOGO! AM 2 PT100 expansion module
provides Pt100 inputs.
Always use twisted and shielded cables for analog signals,
and keep these as short as possible.
Sensor connections
To connect sensors to the LOGO! :
LOGO! 12/24 ....
The inputs of these devices not isolated and therefore require a common reference potential (chassis
ground ).
L+
M
L+ M
I1 I2
I3 I4
I5
At the LOGO! 12/24RC/RCo and
LOGO! 24/24o modules, you can
tap analog signals between the
supply voltage and chassis ground.
I8
LOGO! 230 ....
L3
L2
L1
N
L1 N
28
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
The inputs of these devices are arranged in 2
groups, each consisting
of 4 inputs. Different
phases are only possible
between blocks, but not
within the blocks.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
Warning
!
Current safety regulations (VDE 0110, ... and IEC 61131-2,
... as well as cULus) do not permit the connection of different phases to an AC input group (I1 to I4 or I5 to I8) or to
the inputs of a digital module.
LOGO! AM 2
L
+
M
PE
L+ M
L+ M
PE terminal for connecting earth and
the shielding of the
analog measuring
cable
1 Earth
2 Cable shielding
3
3 DIN rail
RUN/STOP
1
PE
M
L
+
Current
0...20
mA
I1 M1 U1 I2 M2 U2
2
Reference
current
M
Current measurement
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Voltage measurement
29
LOGO! installation and wiring
LOGO! AM 2 PT100
You can connect either a 2- or 3-wire Pt100 resistive thermocouple to the module.
For a 2-wire connection, you need to short-circuit terminals
M1+ and IC1 or M2+ and IC2. Errors caused by the ohmic
resistance of the measuring line are not compensated with
this type of connection. A line resistance of 1 is proportional to a measuring error of +2.5°C.
A 3-wire technique suppresses the influence of the cable
length (ohmic resistance) on the result of the measurement.
2-wire technique
L+ M
L+ M
3-wire technique
L+ M
L+ M
RUN/
STOP
RUN/
STOP
PE
PE
M1+ IC1 M1- M2+ IC2 M2-
Pt100
M1+ IC1 M1- M2+ IC2 M2-
Pt100
Note
When you operate the LOGO! AM 2 PT100 expansion
module on an ungrounded (floating potential) power supply, the indicated temperature value may be subject to
heavy fluctuation.
In this case, connect the shielding of the thermocouple
cable to the negative output / chassis ground output of the
power supply module.
30
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3.3 Connecting outputs
LOGO! ...R...
The LOGO! ...R... version is equipped with relay outputs.
The potential of the relay contacts is isolated from the
power supply and the inputs.
Requirements for relay outputs
You can connect various loads to the outputs, e.g. lamps,
fluorescent lamps, motors, contactor relays etc. For information on the properties required for the loads connected
to the LOGO! ...R..., refer to Appendix A.
Connecting
This is how you connect the load to LOGO! ...R...:
DM8...R
1 Q5 2
1
Q1
2
1
Load
Q2
1
Q6
2
2
Load
Protection with automatic circuit-breaker, max. 16 A, characteristics
B16, e.g.: Power circuit-breaker 5SX2 116-6 (if required)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
31
LOGO! installation and wiring
LOGO! with solid-state outputs
LOGO! versions with solid-state outputs can be identified
by the fact that the letter R is missing from their type name.
The outputs are short circuit-proof and overload-proof. An
auxiliary load voltage supply is not necessary, because
LOGO! supplies the load voltage.
Requirements for solid-state outputs
The load connected to LOGO! must have the following
characteristics:
The maximum switched current is 0.3 A per output.
Connecting
This is how you connect the load to a LOGO! with solidstate outputs:
DM8 24
Q5 M
Q1 M
Q6 M
Q2 M
Load
Load
Load: 24 V DC, 0.3 A max.
32
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
2.4 Switching on the LOGO!/Power On
LOGO! does not have a power switch. The reaction of
LOGO! during startup depends on
Whether a circuit program is stored in LOGO!
Whether a program module (Card) is inserted
Whether this is a LOGO! version without display unit
(LOGO!...o)
The status of LOGO! at the time of power failure.
All possible reaction of LOGO! are described on the following page.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
33
LOGO! installation and wiring
Before power off
No Program
Press ESC
After power on
or
No program
Press ESC
(empty)
No program in
memory
(with program)
Mo 09:00
2003-01-27
I:
or
0.. 123456789
1..0123456789
2..01234 Q:
(empty)
B3:
Par = 0300
= 0028
(with program)
B1
&
Q1
Program in
memory
or
0.. 123456789
1..0123456789
2..01234
Mo 09:00
2002-01-31
I:
0.. 123456789
1..0123456789
2..01234
With stored
program from
LOGO!
......
with a program copied
from the program module
(Card) in
LOGO!
......
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
with stored
program from
LOGO!
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
with program
copied from the
program modul
(Card) in
LOGO!
(empty)
(with program)
34
Mo 09:00
09:00
2002-01-31
I:
LOGO! in
RUN mode
0.. 12345678
9
1..0123456
LOGO!
in RUN mode Cnt
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! installation and wiring
You can also memorize four simple rules for starting
LOGO! :
1. If neither the LOGO! nor the inserted program module
(Card) contains a circuit program, the LOGO! (with display unit ) reports: ’No Program / Press ESC’.
2. A circuit program on the program module (Card) is automatically copied to LOGO!. The circuit program in the
LOGO! is overwritten.
3. If there is a circuit program in LOGO! or on the program
module (Card), LOGO! adopts the operational state it
had prior to POWER-OFF. Versions without display unit
(LOGO!...o) automatically change from STOP to RUN
(LED changes from red to green).
4. If you have enabled retentivity at least for one function,
or a function is permanently retentive, the current values
are retained at POWER-OFF.
Note
When a power failure occurs while you are entering a circuit program, the program in LOGO! will be deleted after
power is returned.
Before you modify the circuit program, you should therefore save a backup copy of your original to a program
module (Card) or to a computer (LOGO!Soft Comfort).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
35
LOGO! installation and wiring
LOGO! Basic operating states
LOGO! Basic/Pure knows two operating states: STOP and
RUN
STOP
RUN
The display shows:
Display: Screen mask for
’No Program’
(not LOGO!...o)
Switching LOGO! to programming mode
(not LOGO!...o)
monitoring I/Os and messages (after START in the
main menu)
(not LOGO!...o)
Switching LOGO! to pa-
LED is red
rameter assignment mode
(not LOGO!...o)
(only LOGO!...o)
LED is green
(only LOGO!...o)
Action of LOGO!:
Action of LOGO!:
The inputs data are not
LOGO! reads the status of
fetched.
the inputs
The circuit program is not
executed
The relay contacts are permanently open or the solidstate outputs are switched
off
LOGO! uses the circuit program to calculate the status of the outputs
LOGO! switches the relay/
solid-state outputs on or off
LOGO! expansion modules, operating states
LOGO! expansion modules know three operating states:
The LED is lit green, red or orange.
LED is lit
Green (RUN)
The expansion
module communicates with the device to its left
36
Red (STOP)
The expansion
module does not
communicate with
the device to its left
Orange
Initialization phase
of the expansion
module
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
3 Programming LOGO!
Getting started with LOGO!
Programming in our context refers to the creation of a circuit program. A LOGO! circuit program program is actually
no more than a circuit diagram presented in a slightly different form!
We have adapted this presentation to the LOGO! display
field. In this chapter we are going to show you how to use
LOGO! to create the LOGO! circuit programs for your application.
At this point, we once again refer to LOGO!Soft Comfort,
which is the LOGO! programming software you can use to
quickly and easily create, test, modify save and print the
circuit programs. The topics in this manual relate only to
the creation of circuit programs on the actual LOGO!, because the programming software LOGO!Soft Comfort already contains an extensive Online Help.
See also Chapter 7.
Note
LOGO! versions without display unit, i.e. the LOGO! 24o,
LOGO! 12/24RCo, LOGO! 24RCo and LOGO! 230RCo
units, do not have an operator panel and display unit. They
are primarily designed for use in small machine and process equipment engineering systems for series production.
LOGO!...o versions are not programmed directly at the
unit. Instead, the circuit program is downloaded to this device by means of LOGO!Soft Comfort or program modules
(Cards) of other LOGO! 0BA4 units.
LOGO! versions without display can not write data to program modules (Cards).
See Chapter 6, 7 and Appendix C.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
37
Programming LOGO!
A small example in the first part of this chapter introduces
the operating principle of LOGO!.
We shall first show you the meaning of two basic terms,
namely the connector and the block.
In the next step, we shall create a circuit program based
on a simple conventional circuit, which you ...
can enter directly in LOGO! in the third step.
It will take you only a few pages of this manual store your
first executable circuit program in the LOGO! unit. With a
suitable hardware (switches etc.), you will then be able to
carry out first tests.
38
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
3.1 Connectors
The LOGO! is equipped with inputs and outputs
Example of a configuration with several modules:
Inputs
L+ M I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 AI1 AI2
L+ M I9 I10 I11I12
L+ M
RUN/STOP
L+ M
L+ M I13I14I15 I16
RUN/STOP
RUN/STOP
PE
1
2
1
2
2Q6
Q5
1
Q1
2
1
Q2
2
1
2
Q3
1
2
Q4
Q7
Outputs
1
2
Q8
1INPUT 2x (..10 V/..20 mA)
A!3 M3U3AI4M4 U4 1
1
Q9
2
Q11
2
1
1
2
Q10
2
Q12
Analog inputs
Each input is identified by the letter I plus a number. When
you take a look at the LOGO! from the front, you can see
the input terminals at the top. Only the analog modules
LOGO! AM 2 and AM 2 PT100 have the inputs at the bottom.
Each output is identified by the letter Q plus a number. In
the figure, you can see the output terminals at the bottom.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
39
Programming LOGO!
Note
LOGO! can recognize, read and switch the I/O of all expansion modules, regardless of their type. The I/O are presented in the installation order of the modules.
The following I/Os and flag blocks are available for the creation of your circuit program: : I1 to I24, AI1 to AI8, Q1 to
Q16, AQ1 and AQ2, M1 to M24 and AM1 to AM6. Also
available are the shift register bits S1 to S8, 4 cursor keys
C , C , C and C , as well as 16 blank outputs X1 to
X16. More details are found in Chapter 4.1.
The following applies to the inputs I7 and I8 of LOGO!
12/24... and LOGO! 24/24o versions: If Ix is used in the
circuit program, this input signal is digital; signals at AIx
are analog. Input AIx can only represent the connector that
is actually capable of handling analog signals.
LOGO!’s connectors
The term connector refers to all connections and states in
LOGO! .
The I/O status can be ’0’ or ’1’. Status ’0’ means that the
input does not carry a voltage. Status ’1’ means that the
input carries voltage.
We have introduced ’hi’, ’lo’ and ’x’ connectors to make it
easier for you to create the circuit program:
’hi’ (high) is assigned the status ’1’,
’lo’ (low) is assigned the status ’0’.
You do not have to use all the of connectors of a block. The
circuit program automatically assigns the unused connectors a status that ensures proper functioning of the relevant
block. If you prefer to do so, you can identify unused connectors with an ’x’.
For information on the meaning of the term “block”, refer to
Chapter 3.2.
40
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
LOGO! knows the following connectors:
Connectors
Inputs
LOGO! Basic / Pure
DM
LOGO! 230RC/RCo,
LOGO! 24 RC/RCo
Two groups:
I1... I4 and
I5 ... I8
I9 ... I24
LOGO! 12/24RC/
RCo, LOGO! 24/24o
I1... I6, I7, I8
AI1, AI2
I9 ... I24
Outputs
Q1...Q4
lo
Logical ’0’ signals (off)
hi
Logical ’1’ signals (on)
x
An existing connection that is not used
AM
AI1...AI8
AI3...AI8
Q5 ...
Q16
none
DM: Digital module.
AM: Analog module.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
41
Programming LOGO!
3.2 Blocks and block numbers
This chapter shows you how to use LOGO! elements to
create complex circuits and how blocks and I/O are interconnected.
In Chapter 3.3 we are going to show you how to transform
a conventional circuit to obtain a LOGO! circuit program.
Blocks
A block in LOGO! represents a function that is used to convert input information into output information. Previously
you had to wire the individual elements in a control cabinet
or terminal box.
When you create the circuit program, you interconnect the
blocks. To do so, simply select the connection you require
from the Co menu The menu name Co is an abbreviation
of the term “Connector”.
Logic operations
The most elementary blocks are the logic operations:
AND
OR
...
I1
I2
x
x
1
Q
Inputs I1 and I2 are here connected
to the OR block. The last two inputs
of the block remain unused and are
identified be the creator of the circuit
program with an ’x’.
These special functions offer you a significantly higher performance:
Pulse relay
Up/down counter
On-delay
Softkey
....
In Chapter 4 you will find a full list of the LOGO! functions.
42
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
View of blocks on the LOGO! display
The figure below shows a typical view of the LOGO! display. As you can see, it can show only one block at a time.
We have therefore introduced block numbers to help you
check the circuit structure.
View of the LOGO! display
Block number assigned by
LOGO!
A further block is connectedat this point
Input
1
x
B2
I3
x
B1
Q1
This connector is not required
Output
Block
Assigning a block number
LOGO! assigns each new block a circuit program a block
number.
LOGO! uses these block numbers to indicate the block interconnections. Hence, these numbers primarily represent
a help for your orientation in the circuit program.
Block numbers
B2
x
I1
I2
I3
These blocks are
interconnected
1
B1
B3
x
I4
I5
I6
1
B1
B1
x
B2
B3
x
1
Q1
B1 Q1
Scrolling the circuit program using the key
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
43
Programming LOGO!
The figure above shows you three views of the LOGO! display, which represent the circuit program. As you can see,
LOGO! interconnects the blocks using their numbers.
Advantages of the block numbers
You can connect almost any block to an input of the current
block by means of its block number. In this way, you can
reuse the interim results of logical or other operations, reduce programming effort, save memory space and clean
up your circuit layout. To do so, however, you need to know
how LOGO! has named the blocks.
Note
We advise you to create an organizational program chart.
You will find this a valuable help when you create the circuit program, because you can enter all block numbers
assigned by LOGO! in this chart.
By using the LOGO!Soft Comfort software to program the
LOGO!, you can directly create a function chart of your
circuit program. LOGO!Soft Comfort also allows you to assign 8-character names to up to 64 blocks, and to view
these on the LOGO! display in parameter assignment and
programming mode (see Chapter 3.4).
44
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
3.3 The way to LOGO!, starting with the circuit diagram
View of a circuit diagram
You know, of course, how a circuit logic is represented in a
circuit diagram. Nevertheless, here is an example:
S1
S2
K1
S3
K1
E1
The load E1 is switched on
and off by means of the
switches (S1 OR S2) AND S3.
Relay K1 picks up when the
condition (S1 OR S2) AND S3
is met.
Creating this circuit with LOGO!
In LOGO! you create a circuit logic by interconnecting
blocks and connectors:
L
1
S1 ... S3
Wiring of the inputs
Circuit program in LOGO!
I1
I2
x
N
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
1
I3
&
Q1
x
Wiring of the outputs
45
Programming LOGO!
Note
Although you have four inputs available for logic operations (Basic functions, see Chapter 4.2), most of the views
will only show three inputs for reasons of clarity. You program this fourth input and assign parameters just like you
do with the other three inputs.
To create a circuit logic in LOGO!, start at the output.
The output is the load or relay that is to be switched.
Convert the circuit logic into blocks by working through the
circuit, starting at the output and ending at the input:
Step 1: The make contact S3 is interconnected in series to
output Q1 and to a further circuit element. A series connection corresponds with the AND block:
&
I3
Q1
x
Step 2: S1 and S2 are connected in parallel. A parallel circuit corresponds with the OR block:
I1
I2
x
1
I3
&
Q1
x
Unused inputs
The circuit program automatically assigns the unused connectors a status that ensures proper functioning of the relevant block. If you like, you can label unused connectors
with an ’x’ identifier.
In our example we shall use only two inputs of the OR
block and two inputs of the AND block; the relevant unused
third and fourth inputs are identified at the connector with
an ’x’.
Now connect the I/Os to the LOGO! .
46
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
Wiring
Connect the switches S1 to S3 to the screw terminals of
your LOGO! :
S1 to connector I1 of LOGO!
S2 to connector I2 of LOGO!
S3 to connector I3 of LOGO!
The output of the AND block controls the relay at output
Q1. The load E1 is connected to output Q1.
Wiring example
The following figure shows you the wiring, based on a
230 V AC version of LOGO!.
L1
N
S S S
1 2 3
L1
1
N
Q1
I1
I2
I3
Input wiring
I4
2
Output wiring
L1
N
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
47
Programming LOGO!
3.4 The 4 Golden rules for the operation of
LOGO!
Rule 1
Changing the operating mode
You create the circuit program in programming mode.
After power is on, and when the display shows “No Program / Press ESC”, press the ESC key to select programming mode.
Timer and parameter values of an existing circuit program can be edited both in parameter assignment
mode and in programming mode. During parameter
assignment the LOGO! is in RUN mode, i.e. it continues execution of the circuit program (see Chapter 5). To
work in programming mode, you need to terminate the
circuit program by calling the “Stop” command.
Select the ’Start’ command on the main menu to set
RUN mode.
When the system is in RUN, you can return to parameter assignment mode by pressing the ESC key.
When parameter assignment mode is open and you
want to return to programming mode, select the
“Stop” command from the parameter assignment
menu, and confirm “Stop Prg” prompt with “Yes”. To
do so, move the cursor to “Yes” and confirm with OK.
For more details on operating modes, refer to Appendix D.
Note
The following applies to 0BA2 device versions and earlier:
You can open programming mode by pressing ++OK.
You set parameter assignment mode by pressing ESC+OK.
48
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
Rule 2
Outputs and inputs
Always create your circuit program by working from the
output to the input.
You can connect an output to several inputs, but not the
same input to several outputs.
Within the same program path you may not connect an
output to an upstream input. For such internal recursions you should interconnect flags or outputs.
Rule 3
Cursor and cursor movement
The following applies when you edit a circuit program:
You can move the cursor when it appears in the form
of an underscore:
– Press , , or to move the cursor in the circuit
program.
– Press OK to change to ”Select connector/block”
– Press ESCto exit programming mode.
You select a connector/block
when the cursor appears as solid square
– Press or to select a connector or a block.
– Confirm with OK.
– Press ESC to return to the previous step.
Rule 4
Planning
Before you start to create a circuit program, you should
either first create design on paper or program LOGO!
directly using LOGO!Soft Comfort.
LOGO! can only save complete and faultless circuit programs.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
49
Programming LOGO!
3.5 Overview of the LOGO! menus
Programming mode
Main menu
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
Programming menu
OK
>Edit..
Clear Prg
Password
ESC
OK
Transfer menu
ESC
= LOGO!
Card
Card
CopyProtect
>
OK
ESC
Real-time clock menu
>Set Clock
S/W Time
Sync
Parameter assignment mode
Parameter assignment menu
>Stop
Set Param
Set Clock
Prg Name
For more details on these menus, refer to Appendix D.
50
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
3.6 Writing and starting the circuit program
After you have designed a circuit, you want to write it to
your LOGO! . The small example below shows how to do
this.
3.6.1 Select programming mode
You have connected the LOGO! to the power supply and
switched it on. The display now shows you the message:
No Program
Press ESC
Switch the LOGO! to programming mode by pressing the
ESC. This will take you to the main menu of the LOGO!:
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
LOGO!’s main menu
The first character in the first line is the ”>” cursor. Press
and to move the ”>” cursor up and down. Move it to ”Program..” and confirm with OK. LOGO! opens the programming menu.
>Edit..
Clear Prg
Password
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
The LOGO!’s programming menu
51
Programming LOGO!
Here you can also move the ”>” cursor by pressing and
. Move the ”>” cursor to ”Edit..” (for editing, i.e. input) and
confirm with OK.
>Edit Prg
Edit Name
Memory?
The Edit menu of LOGO!
Move the ”>” cursor to ”Edit Prg” (for editing the circuit
program) and confirm with OK. LOGO! now shows you the
first output:
The first output of LOGO!
Q1
You are now in programming mode. Press and to select the other outputs. Now start to edit your circuit program.
Note
Because we have not yet saved a password for the circuit
program in LOGO!, you can directly enter editing mode.
When you select “Edit Prg“ after you have saved a password-protected circuit program, you are prompted to enter
a password and to confirm it with OK. You can only edit
the program after you have entered the correct password
(see Chapter 3.6.5.).
52
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
3.6.2 The first circuit program
Let us now take a look at the following parallel circuit consisting of two switches.
Circuit diagram
The corresponding circuit diagram:
S1
S2
The load is switched on with
S1 OR S2. LOGO! interprets
this parallel circuit as an ’OR’
logic, because S1 OR S2
switches on the output.
K1
K1
E1
Translated into a LOGO! circuit program this means: Relay
K1 is at output Q1 is controlled by means of an OR block.
Circuit program
S1 is connected to the I1 and and S2 to the I2 input connector of the OR block.
The corresponding layout of the circuit program in LOGO!:
I1
I2
x
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
1
Q1
53
Programming LOGO!
Wiring
The corresponding wiring:
L1
S1
N
S2
L1
1
Q1
N
2
I1
I2
I1
1
I3
Q2
2
I4
I5
1
Q3
2
I6
I7
1
I8
Q4
2
L
N
S1 switches input I1, while S2 switches input I2. The load is
connected to the relay Q1.
3.6.3 Circuit program input
Let us now write the circuit program, starting at the output
and working towards the input. LOGO! initially shows the
output:
The first LOGO! output
Q1
54
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
You will see an underscore below the Q in Q1, which is the
cursor. The cursor indicates your current position in the
circuit program. You can move the cursor by pressing the
, , and keys. Now press the key. The cursor
moves to the left.
The cursor indicates your current position in the circuit program.
–
Q1
At this point you enter only the first (OR) block. Press OK
to select editing mode.
The cursor is displayed as a solid
square: You can now select a connector or a block
Co
Q1
The cursor no longer appears in the form of an underscore;
but instead as a flashing solid square. LOGO! offers you
here various options.
Select GF (basic functions) by pressing the key until GF
appears, and confirm with OK. LOGO! now shows the first
block from the list of basic functions:
B1
&
The AND is the first block of the basic
functions list. The solid square cursor
prompts you to select a block.
Q1
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
55
Programming LOGO!
Now press
play:
or
until the OR block appears on the dis-
B1
1
The solid square cursor is still positioned on the block.
Q1
Press OK to confirm your entries and exit the dialog.
The display now shows:
B1
–
1
Q1
Block
number
Your complete circuit
program layout
B1
1
Q1
You have now entered the first block. Each new block is
automatically assigned a block number. The only thing left
to do is to interconnect the block inputs. This is how it is
done:
Press OK.
The display now shows:
B1
Co 1
Q1
Select the Co list: Press OK
The display now shows:
B1
x
1
Q1
56
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
The first element of the Co list is the ”Input not used” character, namely the ’x’. Press
or to select input I1.
Note
Press to go the start of the Co list: I1, I2 .... to lo, then
again ’x’. Press to go to the end of the Co list: lo, hi, Q
..... to I1, and once again ’x’.
B1
I1 1
Q1
Press OK. I1 is now connected to the input of the OR
block. The cursor jumps to the next input of the OR block.
The display now shows:
B1
I1
–
Your complete circuit program
in LOGO! up to now:
B1
1
Q1
I1
1
Q1
Now you connect input I2 to the input of the OR block. You
already know how to do this:
1. Switch to editing mode:
Press OK
2. To select the Co list:
Press or
3. To confirm the Co list with:
Press OK
4. To select I2:
Press or
5. To apply I2:
Press OK
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
57
Programming LOGO!
I2 is now connected to the input of the OR block:
The display now shows:
Your circuit program layout in
LOGO! up to now
B1
I1
I2
1
Q1
B1
1
I1
Q1
I2
We do not need the last two inputs of the OR block for this
circuit program. You can mark the unused inputs with an ’x’.
Enter the ’x’ character twice:
1. Switch to editing mode:
Press OK
2. To select the Co list:
Press or
3. To accept the Co list:
Press OK
4. To select ’x’:
Press or
5. To apply x:
Press OK
LOGO! returns to output Q1.
The display now shows:
B1
58
Q1
This is the layout of your
circuit program
B1
I1
I2
x
1
Q1
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
Note
You can invert individual inputs of the basic and special
functions, i.e. if an input carries a logical “1” signal, the circuit program will output a logical “0”; vice versa, a logical
“0” is inverted into a logical “1” signal.
To invert an input, move the cursor to the relevant position,
e.g.:
B1
I1
I2
I3
x
1
Q1
Confirm with OK.
Now press or to invert this input:
Next, press ESC.
B1
I1
I2
I3
x
1
Q1
Your circuit program layout
B1
I1
I2
I3
x
1
Q1
You can review your first circuit program by pressing or
to move the cursor through the circuit program.
We shall now exit circuit programming mode. This is how it
is done:
Return to the programming menu:
Press ESC
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
59
Programming LOGO!
Note
LOGO! has now saved your circuit program to nonvolatile
memory. The circuit program remains in the LOGO! memory until you explicitly delete it.
3.6.4 Assigning a circuit program name
You can assign your circuit program a name that consists
of up to 16 uppercase/lowercase letters, numbers and special characters.
In the programming menu:
1. To move the “>” cursor to ’Edit..’:
Press or
2. To accept ’Edit’:
Press OK
3. Move the “>” cursor to ’Edit Name’: Press or
4. To accept ’Edit Name’:
Press OK
Press and to list the alphabet from A (a) to Z (z), numbers and special characters, either in ascending or descending order. You can select any letter, number or character.
To enter a space character, simply movie the cursor with
to the next position. This character is the first one in the list.
Examples:
Press once to select an “ A ”
four times to select “ { ”, etc.
The following character set is available:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
f
g
h
i
j
k
v
w
x
y
z
”
#
$
%
&
<
=
>
?
60
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
W X
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
e
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
!
’
(
)
*
+
,
–
.
/
:
;
@ [
\
]
^
_
‘
{
|
}
~
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
Let us assume you want to name your circuit program
“ABC”:
5. Select “ A”:
Press
6. Move to the next letter: Press
7. Select “ B”:
Press
8. Move to the next letter: Press
9. Select “ C”:
Press
10.To confirm the complete name: Press OK
Your circuit program is now named “ABC”, and you are returned to the programming menu.
To change the name of your circuit program, proceed in
the same way.
Note
You can change the name of the circuit program only in
programming mode. You can read the name both in programming and in parameter assignment mode
3.6.5 Password
You can protect a circuit program from unauthorized access
by assigning it a password.
To assign a password
A password may have a maximum length of 10 characters,
and consists only of uppercase letters (A to Z). Directly at
the LOGO!, the password can be assigned, edited or deactivated only in the “Password” menu.
In the programming menu:
1. Move the “>” cursor to ’Password’: Press or
2. To confirm the ’Password’:
Press OK
Press or
to move up and down the alphabet to select
your letters. Because LOGO! only provides uppercase letters for the password, you can quickly access to letters “at
the end“ of the alphabet by using the button:
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
61
Programming LOGO!
Press once to select “Z”
Press twice to select “Y”, etc.
Let us assign the password “AA” to our first circuit program. The display now shows:
Old:
No Password
New:
This procedure is the same as for entering the name of the
circuit program. Select “New” and enter:
3. Select “ A”:
Press
4. To move to the next letter:
Press
5. Select “ A”:
Press
The display now shows:
Old:
No Password
New:
6. To confirm the password:
Press OK
Your circuit program is now protected with the password
“AA”, and you are returned to the programming menu.
62
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
Note
You can cancel the input of a new password with ESC. In
this case, LOGO! returns to the programming menu without saving the password.
You can also set your password using LOGO!Soft Comfort.
You can not edit a password-protected circuit program at
the LOGO! or upload it to LOGO!Soft Comfort unless you
enter the correct password.
To allow you to create and edit a circuit program for a protected module (Card), you first need to assign a password
to this new program (see Chapter 6.1).
Changing the Password
You need to know the current password in order to change
it.
In the programming menu:
1. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’Password’:
Press or
2. To confirm the ’Password’:
Press OK
Select “Old” and enter your old password (in our case: ’AA’)
by repeating steps 3 through 6 as described earlier.
The display now shows:
Old:
AA
New:
Now you can select “New” to enter the new password, e.g.
“ZZ”:
3. Select “Z”:
Press
4. To move to the next letter:
Press
5. Select “Z”:
Press
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
63
Programming LOGO!
The display now shows:
Old:
AA
New:
ZZ
6. To confirm your new password: Press OK
Your new password “ZZ” is now set, and you are returned
to the programming menu.
Deactivating the Password
Let us assume you want to deactivate the password for
whichever reason. For example, you want to allow another
user to edit your circuit program. You must know your
current password (in our example “ZZ”), same as if you
were changing it.
In the programming menu:
1. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’Password’:
Press or
2. To confirm the ’Password’:
Press OK
Select “Old” and enter your current password under as
described in steps 3 to 5. Confirm your entries with OK.
The display shows:
Old:
ZZ
New:
Clear the password by leaving the input box blank:
3. To confirm the “blank” password:
Press OK
The password is ”cleared”, and you are returned to the programming menu.
64
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
Note
This action disables the password prompt, and thus permits access without password.
Let the password prompt be deactivated for the time being, in order to accelerate progress in our further exercises
and examples.
Password: Wrong Password!
When the user inputs the wrong password and confirms
the input with OK, LOGO! does not open editing mode, but
returns to the programming menu. This repeats itself over
and again until you input the correct password.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
65
Programming LOGO!
3.6.6 Switching LOGO! to RUN mode
In the main menu, select RUN to start LOGO!.
1. To return to the main menu:
Press ESC
2. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’Start’: Press or
3. To confirm ’Start’:
Press OK
LOGO! runs the circuit program and and shows the following display:
Display field of the LOGO! in RUN mode
Mo 09:00
2003-01-27
Press
I:
0.. 123456789
1..0123456789
2..01234
Date and current time-of-day
(only for versions with realtime clock). This element
flashes if the date and time
are not set.
Inputs I1 to I9
Inputs I10 to I19
Inputs I20 to I24
Press
Q:
Outputs Q1 to Q9
0.. 123456789
1..0123456
Outputs Q10 to Q16
Press
M:
0.. 123456789
1..0123456789
2..01234
Flags M1 to M9
Flags M10 to M19
Flags M20 to M24
Press
ESC+Key
4 cursor keys for manual intervention in the circuit program
(ESC+key)
66
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
What is meant by: ”LOGO! is in RUN”?
In RUN mode, LOGO! executes the circuit program. To do
so, LOGO! first reads the status at the inputs, determines
the status of the outputs by means of the user program,
and switches these on or off according to your settings.
This is how LOGO! indicates the I/O status:
Input/output status is ’1’:
inverted
Input/output status is ’0’:
not inverted
I:
0.. 123456789
1..0123456789
2..01234
Q:
0.. 123456789
1..0123456
In this example, only the inputs I1, I15, Q8 and Q12 are set
“high“.
Status indication on the display
L1
S1
Let us examine
this, using our
example:
=1
I1
S2
I2
I:
0.. 123456789
1..0123456789
2..01234
Q:
0.. 123456789
1..0123456
When switch S1 is closed,
the status at input I1 is hi.
LOGO! computes the output
states by means of the circuit program.
Output Q1 = ’1’, in this
case.
When Q1 = ’1’, LOGO! sets
relay Q1, and the load connected to Q1 is supplied
with voltage.
Q1
N
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
67
Programming LOGO!
3.6.7 Second circuit program
Up to this point, you have successfully created your first
circuit, and assigned it a name and, if desired, a password.
In this section we are going to show you how to modify existing circuit programs and how to use the special functions.
Using this second circuit program, we are going to show
you how to:
Add a block to an existing circuit program.
Select a block for a special function.
Assign parameters.
Modifying circuits
We shall use the first circuit program as a basis for the second, with some slight modifications.
Let us take a first look at the circuit diagram for the second
circuit program:
L1
S1
You already know the first part of
the circuit. S1 and S2 switch a
relay, which is to be used to switch
on the load E1, and to switch off
the load with a delay of 12 minutes.
K1
S2
E1
K1
N
In LOGO!, this is the circuit program layout:
I1
I2
x
1
This is the
new block
x
Par
Q1
You can see the OR block and the output relay Q1 we have
already used in the first circuit program. The only difference
is the new off-delay block.
68
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
Editing the circuit program
Switch the LOGO! to programming mode.
As a reminder:
1. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode
(in RUN: Press ESC to enter the parameter assignment
mode. Select the ’Stop’ command, confirm with OK,
then move the ’>’ cursor to ’Yes’, and once again confirm with OK). See Page 48.
2. On the main menu, select ”Program”
3. On the Programming menu, select “Edit”, confirm with
OK. Next, select ”Edit Prg” and confirm with OK.
If required, enter your password at the prompt and confirm with OK.
You can now modify the current circuit program.
Adding a block to a circuit program
Move the cursor to the B in B1 (B1 is the number of the OR
block):
To move the cursor:
Press
B1
Q1
We now insert the new block at this position.
Confirm with OK.
LOGO! shows you the BN list
BN
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Q1
69
Programming LOGO!
Press to select the SF list:
The SF list contains the special
function blocks.
SF
Q1
Press OK.
The block of the first special function is shown:
Trg
Par
Q1
When you select a special or basic function
block, LOGO! shows you the relevant function block. The solid square cursor is positioned on the block. Press or to select
the required block.
Select your block (off-delay, see the next figure), and then
press OK:
Before you press
’OK’, this shows
the entry Trg
B1
R
Par
B2
The added block is assigned the block number B2. The cursor is positioned at the top
input of the added block.
Q1
The B1 block previously connected to Q1 is automatically
connected to the uppermost input of the new block. Note
that you can only interconnect digital inputs with digital outputs or analog inputs with analog outputs. The ’old’ block
will otherwise be lost.
The off-delay block has three inputs. At the top is the trigger input (Trg) you use to start the off-delay time. In our
example, the OR block B1 triggers the off-delay. You reset
the time and the output with a signal at the reset input. Set
the off-delay time at parameter T of the input Par.
70
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
In our example we do not use the reset input of the offdelay function, and we identify it with an ’x’ connector.
B2
B1
x
Par
This is what the display should now show
Q1
Assigning block parameters
Now you set the off-delay time T:
1. Move the cursor to Par, if it not already at this position:
Press or
2. Switch to editing mode:
Press OK
LOGO! shows the parameters in the parameter assignment
window:
T: The block parameter B2 is a
time function
B2
+R
T =00:00s
Time value
“+” means: The parameter
is shown and can be modified in the parameter assignment mode.
“R” means: Retentivity is
enabled for this block.
Timebase
To change the time value:
Press and to position the cursor.
Press and to modify the value at the relevant position.
Confirm your entries with OK.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
71
Programming LOGO!
Setting the time
Set the time T = 12:00 minutes:
1. Move the cursor to the first digit:
2. Select the digit ’1’:
3. Shift the cursor to the second digit:
4. Select digit ’2’:
5. Move the cursor to the unit:
6. Select the timebase ’m’ (for minutes):
Press
Press
Press
Press
Press
Press
or
or
or
or
or
or
Showing/hiding parameters – the parameter protection mode
If you want to show/hide the parameter and allow/prevent
its modification in parameter assignment mode:
1. Move the cursor to the protection mode: Press or
2. Select the protection mode:
Press or
The display should now show:
B2
T=12:00m
+R
or
Protection mode +:
The value of the time T
can be modified in parameter assignment
mode
3. Confirm your entries with:
B2
T=12:00m
–R
Protection mode – :
The value of the time T
is hidden in parameter
assignment mode
OK
Enabling/disabling retentivity
To decide whether you want to retain your current data after a power failure or not:
1. Move the cursor to the retentivity setting: Press or
2. Select the retentivity setting:
Press or
72
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
The display now shows:
B2
T=12:00m
–R
B2
T=12:00m
or
–/
Retentivity R: Current
data are retained
Retentivity /: Current
data are not retained
3. Confirm your entries with
OK
Note
For further information on the protection mode, refer to
Chapter 4.3.5.
For further information on retentivity,
refer to Chapter 4.3.4.
You can modify the protection mode and retentivity setting
only in programming mode, i.e. this is not possible in parameter assignment mode.
In this manual, the protection mode (”+” or “–”) and retentivity (”R” or “/”) settings are only shown in the displays
where these can actually be changed.
Verification of the circuit program
This program branch for Q1 is now completed. LOGO!
shows you the output Q1. You can once again view the circuit program on the display. Use the keys to browse the
circuit program, i.e. press or to move from block to
block, and to move between the inputs at a block.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
73
Programming LOGO!
Closing the programming mode
Although you were shown how to exit the programming
mode when you created your first circuit program,
here is a reminder:
1. To return to the programming menu:
Press ESC
2. To return to the main menu:
Press ESC
3. To move the ’>’ cursor to ’Start’:
Press or
4. To confirm ’Start’:
Press OK
LOGO! is back in RUN mode:
Mo 09:30
2003-01-27
You can press
or
to scroll the pages and to monitor the I/O
states.
3.6.8 Deleting a block
Let us assume you want to delete the block B2 from your
circuit program and connect B1 directly to Q1.
B1
B2
I1
I2
x
x
Par
Q1
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode
(as a reminder, refer to Page 48).
2. Select ’Edit’:
Press or
3. Confirm ’Edit’:
Press OK
4. Select ’Edit Prg’:
Press or
5. Confirm ’Edit Prg’:
Press OK
(If required, enter your password and confirm with OK).
74
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
6. To move the cursor to the input of Q1, i.e. to B2,
press :
B2
Q1
7. Confirm with OK.
8. Now replace block B2 with block B1 at output Q1.
The procedure:
– Select the BN list:
Press or
– Accept the BN list:
Press OK
– Select ’B1’:
Press or
– Apply ’B1’:
Press OK
Result: Block B2 is deleted, because it is no longer used in
the circuit. Block B1 has replaced B2 directly at the output.
3.6.9 Deleting block groups
Let us assume you want to delete the blocks B1 and B2
from the following circuit program (corresponds with the
circuit program in Chapter 3.6.7).
B1
B2
I1
I2
x
x
Par
Q1
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode
(as a reminder, refer to page 48).
2. To select ’Edit’:
Press or
3. To confirm ’Edit’:
Press OK
4. To select ’Edit Prg’:
Press or
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
75
Programming LOGO!
5. To confirm ’Edit Prg’:
Press OK
(if required, enter your password and confirm with OK).
6. To move the cursor to the input of Q1, i.e. to B2,
press :
B2
Q1
7. Confirm with OK.
8. Now set the connector ’x’ at output Q1 instead of block
B2. To do so:
– Select the Co list:
Press or
– Accept the Co list:
Press OK
– Select ’x’:
Press or
– Apply ’x’:
Press OK
Result: Block B2 is deleted, because it is no longer used in
the circuit. This includes all blocks connected to B2. In this
example, block B1 also.
3.6.10 Correcting typing errors
Programming errors can be corrected easily in LOGO! :
Provided editing mode is not yet closed, you can revert
by one step by pressing ESC.
If you have already configured all inputs, simply reconfigure the faulty input:
1. Move the cursor to the faulty position
2. Change to editing mode. Press OK
3. Enter the correct input circuit.
You can only replace a block with a block that has exactly
the same number of inputs. However, you can delete the
old block and then insert a new one. You can choose any
new block.
76
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
3.6.11 Deleting the circuit program
To delete a circuit program:
1. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
LOGO! opens the main menu
2. On the main menu, press
to ’Program’. Press OK.
>Edit..
Clear Prg
Password
or
to move the ’>’ cursor
LOGO! changes to the programming
menu
3. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’Clear Prg’:
4. Confirm ’Clear Prg’:
Press or
Press OK
Clear Prg
>No
Yes
To cancel deletion of the circuit program, leave the ’>’ cursor at ’No’ and press OK.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
77
Programming LOGO!
If you are sure that you want to delete the circuit program
from memory:
5. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’Yes’:
Press or
6. Press OK.
Password?
ZZ
To prevent unintentional deletion of
your circuit program, you are
prompted to enter your password
(provided you have assigned one).
7. Enter your password.
8. Press OK. The circuit program is deleted.
Note
Although you may have forgotten your password, you can
still delete the circuit program by entering the wrong password four times.
3.6.12 Summertime/wintertime conversion
You can enable or disable automatic Summertime/wintertime conversion in programming mode by calling the
“Clock” menu command.
1. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode.
2. You are now in the main menu and want to select the
’Clock’ menu command:
Press or
3. Confirm ’Clock’:
Press OK
4. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’S/W Time’: Press or
5. Confirm ’S/W Time’:
Press OK
78
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
LOGO! shows the following display:
>On
Off
S/W Time:
Off
The current setting of automatic S/W Time conversion is
shown in the bottom row. The default setting is ’Off’: disabled.
Enabling summertime/wintertime conversion
You now want to enable this conversion and define or set
its parameters:
1. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’On’:
Press or
2. Confirm ’On’:
Press OK
The display shows:
>EU
3. Select the desired conversion:
Press or
What is shown on the display ?:
’EU’ represents the start and end of European summertime.
’UK’ represents the start and end of summertime in the
United Kingdom.
’US’ represents the start and end of summertime in the
United States.
’AUS’ represents the start and end of Australian
summertime.
’AUS-TAS’ represents the start and end of Australian/
Tasmanian summertime.
’NZ’ represents the start and end of New Zealand
summertime.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
79
Programming LOGO!
. . : Here you can enter any month, day and time zone
difference.
The preset conversion data for EU, UK and US are found in
the table below:
Start of summertime
End of summertime
Time zone difference ∆
EU
Last Sunday in March:
02:00––>03:00
Last Sunday in October: 03:00––>02:00
60 Min.
UK
Last Sunday in March:
01:00––>02:00
Last Sunday in October: 02:00––>01:00
60 Min.
US
First Sunday in April:
02:00––>03:00
Last Sunday in October: 02:00––>01:00
60 Min.
AUS
Last Sunday in October: 02:00––>03:00
Last Sunday in March:
03:00––>02:00
60 Min.
AUS- First Sunday in OctoTAS ber: 02:00––>03:00
Last Sunday in March:
03:00––>02:00
60 Min.
NZ
First Sunday in October: 02:00––>03:00
Third Sunday in March:
03:00––>02:00
60 Min.
..
Customizing the month
and the day: 02:00––>
02:00 + Time zone difference
Customizing the month
and the day: 03:00––>
03:00 – Time zone difference
User-defined
(resolution in
minutes)
Note
You can specify a time zone difference ∆ between 0 and
180 minutes.
Let us assume you want to enable European summertime/
wintertime conversion:
4. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’EU’:
Press or
5. Confirm ’EU’:
Press OK
80
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
LOGO! shows the following display:
>On
Off
S/W Time:
OnEU
LOGO! indicates that European S/W Time conversion is
enabled.
User-defined parameters
If none of the parameters/conversions apply to your country, you can customize these under menu item ’. .’. To do
so:
1. Confirm ’On’ once again:
Press OK
2. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’. .’:
Press or
3. Confirm the menu item ’. .’ :
PressOK
The display shows:
Cursor / solid square
MM–DD
+ : 0
01–01
– : 01–01
=000min
Month (MM) and Day (DD)
Start of summertime
End of summertime
The desired time zone difference in
[min]
Let us assume you want to configure the following parameters: Start of summertime = 31st of March, end of summertime = 1st of November, time difference of 120 minutes.
This is how you can enter your data:
Press or to move the solid square/cursor.
Press and to change the value at the cursor position.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
81
Programming LOGO!
The display shows:
MM–DD
+ : 0
03–31
– : 11–01
=120 min
31. March
1. November
Time difference of 120 min
Confirm all your entries with OK.
You have now customized the summertime/wintertime conversion. The LOGO! display now shows:
>On
Off
S/W Time:
On..
LOGO! indicates that summertime/wintertime conversion is
enabled, and that user-defined parameters ( ’..’ ) have been
set.
Note
To disable summertime/wintertime conversion in this
menu, you merely confirm ’Off’ with OK.
82
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
3.6.13 Synchronization
Time synchronization between LOGO! and the connected
expansion modules can be enabled/disabled in programming mode by means of the real-time clock menu (“Clock”
menu item).
1. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode.
2. You are now in the main menu, and want to select
’Clock’:
Press or
3. Confirm ’Clock’:
Press OK
4. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’Sync’: Press or
5. Apply ’Sync’:
Press OK
LOGO! shows the following display:
>On
Off
Sync:
Off
The current setting of the automatic synchronization function is displayed in the bottom row. The default setting is
’Off’: disabled.
Enabling synchronization
You want to enable synchronization:
1. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’On’:
Press or
2. Confirm ’On’:
Press OK
LOGO! shows the following display:
>On
Off
Sync:
On
When synchronization is enabled, LOGO! transmits the
time-of-day to the expansion modules once daily, after each
transition to RUN mode and when the TOD is changed after a ’Set Clock’ is executed or after a summertime/wintertime conversion.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
83
Programming LOGO!
3.7 Memory space and circuit dimensions
The size of a circuit program in LOGO! is limited by the
memory space (memory used by the blocks).
Memory areas
Program memory:
LOGO! allows only a limited number of blocks in your
circuit program.
The second limitation is based on the maximum number
of bytes a circuit program may contain. The total number of bytes used can be determined by adding up the
number of bytes used for the relevant function blocks.
Retentive memory (Rem):
In this area, LOGO! stores process variables which
need to be retentive, e.g. the hours counter value.
Blocks with optional retentivity use this memory area
only if this function is actually enabled.
Resources available in LOGO!
A circuit program in LOGO! can occupy the following maximum resources:
Bytes
Blocks
REM
2000
130
60
LOGO! monitors memory utilization, and offers only those
functions from the lists for which it can actually provide sufficient memory space.
84
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
Memory requirements
The table below shows an overview of the memory requirements for the basic and special function blocks:
Function
Program
memory
Rem
memory*
AND
12
–
AND with edge evaluation
12
–
NAND (NOT AND)
12
–
NAND with edge evaluation
12
–
OR
12
–
NOR (NOT OR)
12
–
XOR (exclusive OR)
8
–
NOT (Negation)
4
–
On-delay
8
3
Off-delay
12
3
On-/Off-delay
12
3
Retentiveon-delay
12
3
Wiping relay (pulse output)
8
3
Edge triggered wiping relay
16
4
Asynchronous pulse generator
12
3
Random generator
12
–
Stairway lighting switch
12
3
Multiple function switch
16
3
Weekly timer
20
–
Yearly timer
8
–
Basic functions
Special functions
Times
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
85
Programming LOGO!
Function
Program
memory
Rem
memory*
Up/down counter
24
5
Hours counter
24
9
Threshold trigger
16
–
Analog threshold trigger
16
–
Analog differential trigger
16
–
Analog comparator
24
–
Analog value monitoring
20
–
Analog amplifier
12
–
Latching relay
8
1
Pulse relay
12
1
Message texts
8
–
Softkey
8
2
Shift register
12
1
Counter
Analog
Others
*: Bytes in the Rem memory area, if retentivity is enabled.
Utilization of memory areas
An indication of insufficient memory space is given, when
the system does not allow you to add a further block to
your circuit program. LOGO! offers you only the blocks for
which it can provide sufficient memory space. If LOGO! memory space is insufficient to hold any further blocks you
select from a block list, the system will deny access to this
list.
If memory space is fully occupied, optimize your circuit program, or install a second LOGO!.
86
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Programming LOGO!
Calculating memory requirements
When calculating the memory requirements of a circuit, you
must always take all individual areas of memory into account.
Example:
Bytes REM
20
Bytes REM
–
12
B3
–
B2
B1
No 1
No 2
No 3
x
Q1
x
I2
B4
I1
Par
B6
B5
I3
I4
x
Par
Q2
The sample circuit program contains:
Block
no
no.
Memory area
Function
Bytes
Blocks
REM
B1
OR
12
1
–
B2
AND
12
1
–
B3
Weekly timer
20
1
–
B4
On-delay*
8
1
3
B5
Stairway lighting switch
12
1
0
B6
AND
12
1
–
Resources used by the circuit program
76
6
3
Memory space limits in LOGO!
2000
130
60
Still available in LOGO!
1924
124
57
*: Configured with retentivity.
Hence, this circuit program fits into LOGO!.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
87
Programming LOGO!
Indication of available memory space
LOGO! shows you the amount of free memory space.
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode
(as a reminder, refer to page 48).
2. Select ’Edit’:
Press or
3. Accept ’Edit’:
Press OK
4. Select ’Memory?’:
Press or
5. Accept ’Memory?’:
Press OK
The display now shows:
Free Memory:
Byte =1924
Block= 124
Rem = 57
88
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
4 LOGO! functions
Organization
LOGO! provides you with various elements in programming
mode. In order to maintain the overview, we have organized the elements in ’Lists’. These lists are:
Co: Connector list (Connector)
(see Chapter 4.1)
GF: List of the basic functions AND, OR, ...
(refer to Chapter 4.2)
SF: List of the special functions
(refer to Chapter 4.4)
BN: List of reusable blocks configured in the circuit
program
List contents
All lists show the elements available in LOGO!. Usually, this
includes all connectors, basic functions and special functions the LOGO! knows. This includes all the blocks you
have created in LOGO! by the time you call the BN list.
If not all is shown
LOGO! does not show all elements if:
No further blocks may be added.
This is either an indication of insufficient memory space
or that the maximum number of blocks has been
reached.
A specific block’s memory space requirement would exceed the space available in LOGO!.
See Chapter 3.7.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
89
LOGO! functions
4.1 Constants and connectors – Co
Constants and connectors (= Co) represent inputs, outputs,
flags and constant voltage levels (constants).
Inputs:
1) Digital inputs
Digital inputs are identified with an I. The number of the
digital inputs (I1, I2, ...) corresponds with the number of the
input connectors of the LOGO! Basic and of the connected
digital modules, in the order of their installation. See the
following figure.
2) Analog inputs
The LOGO! versions LOGO! 24, LOGO! 24o,
LOGO! 12/24RC and LOGO! 12/24RCo are equipped with
the inputs I7 and I8, which can also be programmed for use
as AI1 and AI2 inputs. Signals at the I7 and I8 inputs are
interpreted as digital values, and those at the AI1 and AI2
inputs are interpreted as analog values. The inputs of a
connected analog module are numbered according to the
already existing analog inputs. Special functions whose
inputs should only be connected to analog inputs are offered in programming mode when you select the input signal, i.e. the analog inputs AI1...AI8, analog flags
AM1...AM6, the block numbers of a function with analog
output or the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2.
Outputs:
1) Digital outputs
Digital outputs are identified by the character Q. The output
numbers (Q1, Q2, ... Q16) correspond with the numbers of
the output connectors at the LOGO! Basic and with those
of the expansion modules, in their order of installation. See
the following figure.
90
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
There are also 16 blank outputs available. These are identified with an x and can not be reused in a circuit program (in
contrast to flags, for example). The list shows all programmed blank outputs, and one blank output which is not
yet configured. A blank output, for example, is useful for the
special function “Message texts” (see Chapter 4.4.23), if
only the message text is of significance to a circuit program.
2) Analog outputs
Analog outputs are identified by the letters AQ. Two analog
outputs are available, namely AQ1 and AQ2. You can only
set an analog value at the analog output, i.e. a function with
an analog output or analog flag AM.
Inputs
L+ M I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 AI1 AI2
L+ M I9 I10 I11I12
L+ M
RUN/STOP
L+ M
RUN/STOP
L+ M I13I14I15 I16
RUN/STOP
PE
Q6
Q10
1
2 1
1
2
1INPUT 2x (..10 V/..20 mA) Q9
2
2
1
2 Q8 A!3 M3U3AI4M4 U4 Q11
1
2 Q12
Q7
1
2
1
2
Q5
1
Q1
2
1
Q2
2
1
2
Q3
1
2
Q4
Outputs
Analog inputs
Flag blocks
Flag blocks are identified by the letters M or AM . These
are virtual outputs, which output the value of their inputs.
LOGO! provides 24 digital flags M1 ... M24 and 6 analog
flags AM1 ... AM6.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
91
LOGO! functions
Startup flag
Flag M8 is set in the first cycle of the user program and can
thus be used in your circuit program as startup flag. This
signal is automatically reset after the circuit program has
completed its first cycle.
The M8 flag can be used in all further cycles for setting,
deletion and evaluation procedures in the same way as
other flags.
Note
The output of the flag always carries the signal of the previous program cycle. This value does not change within
the same program cycle.
Shift register bits
LOGO! provides the shift register bits S1 to S8, which are
assigned the read-only attribute in the circuit program. The
content of shift register bits can only be modified by means
of the “Shift register” special function (see Chapter 4.4.25).
Cursor keys
Up to four cursor keys are available to you, namely C ,
C , C and C (”C” = “Cursor”). Cursor keys are programmed for the circuit program in the same ways as other
inputs. You can set the cursor keys in the corresponding
display while the system is in RUN (see Chapter 3.6.6),
and in an active message text (ESC + Key). Cursor keys
can save switches and inputs, and allow operator control of
the circuit program.
Levels
Voltage levels are designated hi and lo. A constant “1” = hi
or “0” = lo status at the block can be set by means of a permanent voltage level or constant value hi or lo.
Open connectors
Unused block connectors can be identified with an x.
92
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.2 Basic functions list – GF
Basic functions represent simple logical elements of Boolean algebra.
You can invert the inputs of individual basic functions , i.e.
the circuit program inverts a logical “1” at a relevant input to
a logical “0”; if “0” is set at the input, the program sets a
logical “1”. A programming example is found in
Chapter 3.6.3.
The GF list contains the basic function blocks you can use
for your circuit program. The following basic functions are
available:
View in the circuit
diagram
View in LOGO!
Name of the basic
function
AND
Series circuit
make contact
(see page 95)
AND with edge
evaluation
(see page 96)
NAND
(NOT AND)
(see page 97)
Parallel circuit with
break contacts
NAND with edge
evaluation
(see page 98)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
93
LOGO! functions
View in the circuit
diagram
View in LOGO!
Name of the basic
function
OR
(see page 99)
Parallel circuit with
make contacts
Series circuit with
break contacts
NOR
(NOT OR)
(see page 100)
XOR
(exclusive OR)
Double changeover contact
Break
contact
94
(see page 101)
NOT
(negation, inverter)
(see page 101)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.2.1 AND
Symbol in LOGO!:
Circuit diagram of a series circuit with several make contacts:
The output of the AND is only 1 if all inputs are 1, i.e. all
contacts are closed.
At an unused block input (x): x = 1.
Table of the AND logic
1
2
3
4
Q
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
95
LOGO! functions
4.2.2 AND with edge evaluation
Symbol in LOGO!:
The output of an edge triggered AND is only 1 if all inputs
are 1 and if at least one input was low in the previous cycle.
At an unused block input (x): x = 1.
Timing diagram for the AND with edge evaluation
1
2
3
4
Q
Cycle
96
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.2.3 NAND (NOT AND)
Parallel circuit with multiple break
contacts in the circuit diagram:
Symbol in LOGO!:
The output of the NAND is only 0 if the status at all inputs
is 1, i.e. the contacts are closed.
At an unused block input (x): x = 1.
Table of the NAND logic
1
2
3
4
Q
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
97
LOGO! functions
4.2.4 NAND with edge evaluation
Symbol in LOGO!:
The output status of the NAND with edge evaluation is only
1 if at least one input is 0 and if all inputs were 1 in the
previous cycle.
At an unused block input (x): x = 1.
Timing diagram for the NAND with edge evaluation
1
2
3
4
Q
Cycle
98
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.2.5 OR
Circuit diagram of a parallel circuit with several make contacts:
Symbol in LOGO!:
The output status of the OR element is only 1 if at least
one input is 1, i.e. at least one of the contacts is closed.
At an unused block input (x): x = 0.
Table of the OR logic
1
2
3
4
Q
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
99
LOGO! functions
4.2.6 NOR (NOT OR)
Symbol in LOGO!:
Circuit diagram of a series circuit with several break contacts:
The output status of the NOR is only 1 if all inputs are 0,
i.e. if switched off. The NOR output is set to 0 when one of
the inputs is switched on (logical 1 status).
At an unused block input (x): x = 0.
Table of the NOR logic
100
1
2
3
4
Q
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.2.7 XOR (exclusive OR)
The XOR in a circuit diagram,
shown as series circuit with 2
changeover contacts:
Symbol in LOGO!:
The output status of the XOR is 1 if the inputs are not
equivalent.
At an unused block input (x): x = 0.
Table of the XOR logic
1
2
Q
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
4.2.8 NOT (Negation, Inverter)
A break contact in the circuit
diagram:
Symbol in LOGO!:
The output status is 1 if the input is 0. The NOT block inverts the input status.
Advantage of the NOT block, for example: The LOGO!
does not require break contacts. You simply use a make
contact and the NOT block to convert these into a break
contact.
Table of the NOT logic
1
Q
0
1
1
0
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
101
LOGO! functions
4.3 Basics on special functions
Because of their different input designation, you can see
right away that there is a difference between the special
functions and basic functions. SFs contain timer functions,
retentive functions and various parameter assignment options, which allow you to adapt the circuit program to suit
your own requirements.
This section provides you with a brief overview of input
designations and with some particular background information on SFs. The SFs in particular are described in
Chapter 4.4.
102
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.3.1 Designation of the inputs
Logical inputs
Here, you will find the description of the connectors you
can use to create a logical link to other blocks or to the inputs of the LOGO! unit.
S (Set):
A signal at input S sets the output to logical “1”.
R (Reset):
The reset input R takes priority over all other inputs and
resets the outputs.
Trg (Trigger):
This input is used to trigger the start of a function.
Cnt (Count):
This input is used for counting pulses.
Fre (Frequency):
Frequency signals to be evaluated are applied to this
input.
Dir (Direction):
This input determines the direction of count,
for example.
En (Enable):
This input enables a block function. When this input is
“0”, other signal from the block will be ignored.
Inv (Invert):
A signal at this input inverts the output signal of the
block.
Ral (Reset all):
All internal values are reset.
Connector X at SF inputs
SF inputs connected to connector x are set low. That is, the
inputs carry a ’lo’ signal.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
103
LOGO! functions
Parameter inputs
At some of the inputs you do not apply any signals. You
configure the relevant block values instead. Examples:
Par (Parameter):
This input will not be connected. Here, you set the relevant block parameters (times, on/off thresholds etc.).
No (Cam):
This input will not be connected. Here, you configure the
time patterns.
P (Priority):
This is an open input. Here, you define priorities and
specify whether a message is to be acknowledged in
RUN.
4.3.2
Time response
Parameter T
At some of the SFs it is possible to configure a time value
T. When you preset this time, note that your input values
are based on the timebase set:
Timebase
__
:
__
s (seconds)
seconds
:
1/
100
m (minutes)
minutes
:
seconds
hours
:
minutes
h (hours)
B1
+
T =04:10h
seconds
Setting a time T of 250 minutes:
Unit in hours h:
04:00 hours
00:10 hours
=
240 minutes
+10 minutes
250 minutes
Note
Always specify a time T in 0.02 s. The time T is not defined for T 0.02 s.
104
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Accuracy of T
Because of slight tolerances in the characteristics of electronic components, the set time T may deviate. The LOGO!
has a maximum tolerance of 0.02 %.
When 0.02 % of the time T is smaller than 0.02 seconds,
the maximum deviation is 0.02 seconds.
Example:
The maximum tolerance per hour (3600 seconds) is
0.02 %, which is proportional to 0.72 seconds.
The maximum toloerance per minute (60 seconds) is
0.02 seconds.
Accuracy of the timer (weekly/yearly timer)
To prevent timing inaccuracy of the real-time clock in C versions caused by this deviation, the timer value is continuously compared with a high-precision timebase and corrected. The resultant maximum timing inaccuracy is 5
s/day.
4.3.3 Backup of the real-time clock
Because the internal real-time clock of a LOGO! is backed
up, it continues operation after a power failure. The ambient temperature influences the backup time. At an ambient
temperature of 25°C , the typical backup time is 80 hours.
4.3.4 Retentivity
The switching states and counter values of SFs can be set
retentive. This means that current data are retained after a
power failure, and that the block resumes operation at the
break point. The timer is not reset, but resumes operation
until the time-to-go has expired, for example.
To enable this response, however, the relevant functions
must be set retentive. Two options are available:
R: The data are retained.
/: Current data are not retained (default). See the example
on Page 72.
The hours counter forms an exception, because this function is always retentive.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
105
LOGO! functions
4.3.5 Parameter protection
In the parameter protection settings, you can determine
whether the parameters can be displayed and edited in
LOGO! parameter assignment mode or not. Two options
are available:
+: The parameter attribute permits read/write access in parameter assignment mode (default).
–: The parameter settings are read/write protected in parameter assignment mode, and can be edited only in the
programming mode. See the example on Page 72.
4.3.6 Calculating the gain and offset of analog values
A sensor is connected to the analog input and converts a
process variable into an electrical signal. This value of signal lies within the typical range of this sensor.
LOGO! always converts the electrical signals at the analog
input into digital values from 0 to 1000.
A voltage of 0 to 10 V at input AI is transformed internally
into range of values from 0 to 1000. An input voltage exceeding 10 V is shown as internal value 1000.
Because you can not always process the range of values
from 0 to 1000 as predetermined by LOGO!, you can multiply the digital values by a gain factor and then shift the zero
of the range of values (offset). This allows you to output an
analog value to the LOGO! display, which is proportional to
the actual process variable.
Parameter
Maximum
Input voltage (in V)
0
≥ 10
Internal value
0
1000
00.00
10.00
–10000
+10000
Gain
Offset
106
Minimum
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Mathematical rule
Actual value Ax =
(internal value at input Ax gain) + offset
Gain and offset calculation
The gain and offset is calculated based on the relevant high
and low values of the function.
Example 1:
The available thermocouples have the following technical
data: –30 to +70C, 0 to 10 V DC (i.e. 0 to 1000 in LOGO!).
Actual value = (internal value gain) + offset, thus
–30
= (0 A) + B, i.e. offset B = –30
+70
= (1000 A) –30, i.e. gain A = 0.1
Example 2:
A pressure sensor converts a pressure of 1000 mbar into a
voltage of 0 V, and a pressure of 5000 mbar into a voltage
of 10 V.
Actual value = (internal value gain) + offset, thus
1000
= (0 A) + B, i.e. offset B = 1000
5000
= (1000 A) +1000, i.e. gain A = 4
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
107
LOGO! functions
Example of analog values
Process
variable
Voltage
(V)
Internal
value
Gain
Offset
Value
shown
(Ax)
–30 C
0 C
+70 C
1000 mbar
0
3
10
0
0
300
1000
0
0.1
0.1
0.1
4
–30
–30
–30
1000
–30
0
70
1000
3700 mbar
6.75
675
4
1000
3700
5000 mbar
10
1000
4
1000
5000
0
5
10
0
5
10
0
5
10
0
5
10
0
5
10
0
5
10
0
10
0
500
1000
0
500
1000
0
500
1000
0
500
1000
0
500
1000
0
500
1000
0
1000
0.01
0.01
0.01
1
1
1
10
10
10
0.01
0.01
0.01
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
5
500
500
500
–200
–200
–200
–10000
–10000
0
5
10
0
500
1000
0
5000
10000
5
10
15
500
1000
1500
–200
300
800
–10000
0
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
2
2
2
2
0.01
0.1
1
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
20
A sample application is found in the description of the “Analog comparator” SF on Page 165.
For further information on analog inputs,
refer to Chapter 4.1.
108
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list – SF
When you create your circuit program in LOGO!, you find
the special function blocks in the SF list.
You can invert the inputs of SFs individually, i.e. the circuit
program converts a logical “1” at the input into a logical “0”;
a logical “0” it converts into a logical “1”. An example of the
program code found in Chapter 3.6.3.
The table also specifies whether the relevant function can
be set retentivity (Rem). The following SFs are available:
View
inLOGO!
Name of the
special function
Rem
Times
On-delay
REM
(see page 113)
Off-delay
REM
(see page 117)
On-/Off-delay
REM
(see Page 119)
Retentive
on-delay
REM
(see page 121)
Wiping relay (pulse output)
REM
(see page 123)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
109
LOGO! functions
View
inLOGO!
Name of the
special function
Edge triggered
wiping relay
Rem
REM
(see page 125)
Asynchronous pulse generator
REM
(see Page 128)
Random generator
(see page 130)
Stairway lighting switch
REM
(see page 132)
Multiple function switch
REM
(see page 135)
Weekly timer
(see Page 138)
Yearly timer
(see Page 143)
110
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
View
inLOGO!
Name of the
special function
Rem
Counter
Up/down counter
REM
(see Page 146)
Hours counter
REM
(see page 150)
Threshold trigger
Fre
(see Page 155)
Analog
Analog threshold trigger
(see page 158)
Analog differential trigger
(see page 161)
Analog comparator
(see Page 165)
Analog value monitoring
(see Page 170)
Analog amplifier
(see Page 173)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
111
LOGO! functions
View
inLOGO!
Miscellaneous
Name of the
special function
Latching relay
Rem
REM
(see Page 175)
Pulse relay
REM
(see Page 176)
Message texts
P
(see Page 179)
Softkey
En
Par
Q
REM
(see Page 186)
Shift register
REM
(see Page 190)
112
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.1
On-delay
Short description
The output is only set after a configurable on-delay time
has expired.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input Trg
You start the on-delay with a
negative edge (1 to 0 transition) at input Trg (Trigger).
Parameter
T represents the time after
which the output is switched
on (0 to 1 transition of the
output signal).
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
R = the status is retentive.
Output Q
Q is switched on when the
set time T has expired, provided Trg is still set.
Parameter T
Please note the defaults for parameter T in Chapter 4.3.2.
The time for parameter T can also be preset based on the
actual value of another, already configured function. You
can use the actual values of the following functions:
Analog comparator (actual value Ax – Ay,
see Chapter 4.4.18)
Analog threshold trigger (actual value Ax,
see Chapter 4.4.16)
Analog amplifier (actual value Ax, see Chapter 4.4.20)
and
Counter (actual value Cnt, see Chapter 4.4.13).
Select the required function by means of the block number.
The timebase is adjustable. Please note the following listing:
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
113
LOGO! functions
Valid ranges of the timebase, if T = parameter
Timebase
max. value min. resolution
Accuracy
s (seconds)
99:99
10 ms
+ 10 ms
m (minutes)
99:59
1s
+1s
h (hours)
99:59
1 min
+ 1 min
The display in programming mode (example):
B12
+R
T =04:10h
Valid ranges of the timebase, if T = Actual value of an already
programmed function
Timebase
max. value
Meaning
Accuracy
ms
99990
Number of
ms
+ 10 ms
s
5999
Number of s
+1s
m
5999
Number of
min
+ 1 min
The display in programming mode (example):
B12
+R
T B006s
If the referenced block (B6, in the example) returns a value
that lies out of the valid range, the value is rounded up or
down to the next valid value.
114
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Parameter preset = Actual value of an already programmed
function
How to include the actual value of an actual value of an
already programmed function:
1. Press
ter T.
to move the cursor to the equal sign of parame-
B12
+R
T =04:10h
Press
twice
B12
+R
T =04:10h
2. Press to change the equal sign into an arrow. If it exists, the last referenced block and its timebase is shown.
B12
+R
T B006s
3. Press to move the cursor to the “B” of the shown
block, and then press to select the required block
number.
4. Press to move the cursor to the block’s timebase and
press to select the required timebase.
B12
+R
T B006m
The view in parameter assignment mode (example):
B12
T =04:10
=04:10h
Ta =02:00h
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
or
current
time
B12
T B006m
Ta =02:00h
115
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram
Trg
Q
T
T
The bold section of
the timing diagram is
also shown in the
on-delay icon.
Ta expires
Functional description
The time Ta is triggered with a 0 to 1 transition at input Trg
(Ta is the current LOGO! time).
If the status of input Trg is 1 at least for the duration of the
configured time T, the output is set to 1 on expiration of this
time (the output follows the input with on-delay).
The time is reset when the status at input Trg returns to 0
before the time T has expired.
The output is reset to 0 when the signal at input Trg is 0.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are
reset after a power failure.
116
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.2
Off-delay
Short description
When an on-delay is set, the output is reset when the configured time has expired.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input Trg
You start the off-delay time
with a negative edge (1 to 0
transition) at input Trg (Trigger)
Input R
A signal at input R resets
the on-delay time and the
output.
Parameter
T is the time that expires after which the output is
switched off (1 to 0 transition of the output signal).
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
Q is set with a signal at input Trg. It holds this state
until T has expired.
Parameter T
Please note the parameter T defaults specified in
Chapter 4.3.2.
The time for parameter T can be based on the actual value
of another, already configured function. You can use the
process variables of the following functions:
Analog comparator (actual value Ax – Ay,
see Chapter 4.4.18)
Analog threshold trigger (actual value Ax,
see Chapter 4.4.16)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
117
LOGO! functions
Analog amplifier (actual value Ax, see Chapter 4.4.20)
and
Up/down counter (actual value Cnt,
see Chapter 4.4.13).
Select the required function by means of the block number.
The timebase is configurable. For information on valid timebase ranges and parameter preset, refer to Chapter 4.4.1.
Timing diagram
Trg
The bold section of
the timing diagram
also appears in the
off-delay symbol.
R
Q
Ta expires
T
T
Functional description
Output Q is set to hi immediately when the input Trg
changes to hi.
The actual time Ta in LOGO! is retriggered at the 1 to 0
transition of Trg. The output remains set. Output Q is reset
to 0 with off-delay when Ta reaches the value configured at
T (Ta=T).
The time Ta is retriggered with a one-shot at input Trg.
You can set input R (Reset) to reset the time Ta and the
output before Ta has expired.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are
reset after a power failure.
118
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.3
On-/Off-delay
Short description
The on-/off-delay function sets the output after the set ondelay time has expired, and resets it upon expiration of the
off-delay time.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Input Trg
Description
A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input Trg (Trigger)
triggers the on-delay time
TH .
A negative edge (1 to 0
transition) at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the off-delay
time TL.
Parameter
TH is the time after which
the output is set hi (output
signal transition 0 to 1).
TL is the time after which
the output is reset ( output
signal transition 1 to 0).
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Q is set when the configured time TH has expired
and Trg is still set. It is reset
on expiration of the time TL,
if the trigger Trg has not
been set again.
119
LOGO! functions
Parameters TH and TL
Note the preset values for the parameters TH and TL in
Chapter 4.3.2.
Timing diagram
Trg
Q
TH
TH
TH
The bold section
of the timing diagram is also
shown in the on/
off-delay symbol.
Ta expires
TL
TL
TL
Ta expires
Functional description
The time TH is triggered with a 0 to 1 transition at input Trg.
If the status at input Trg is 1 at least for the duration of the
time TH, the output is set to 1 on expiration of the time TH
(the output follows the input with on-delay).
The time is reset when the signal at input Trg is reset to 0
before the time TH has expired..
A 1 to 0 transition at input Trg triggers the time TL.
If the status at input Trg is 0 at least for the duration of the
signal TL, the output is set to 0 on expiration of the time TL
(the output follows the input with off-delay).
The time is reset when the signal at input Trg changes to 1
again before the time TL has expired.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are
reset after a power failure.
120
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.4
Retentive on-delay
Short description
A one-shot at the input triggers a configurable on-delay
time. The output is set when this time has expired.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input Trg
A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the on-delay
time.
Input R
A signal at input R resets
the on-delay time and the
output.
Parameter
T represents the on-delay
time for the output (output
status transition 0 to 1).
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
Q is set after the time T has
expired.
Parameter T
Note the defaults specified in Chapter 4.3.2.
The time for parameter T can be based on the process
variable of another, already programmed function. You can
use the process variables of the following functions:
Analog comparator (actual value Ax - Ay,
see Chapter 4.4.18)
Analog threshold trigger (actual value Ax,
see Chapter 4.4.16)
Analog amplifier (actual value Ax, see Chapter 4.4.20)
and
Up/down counter (actual value Cnt,
see Chapter 4.4.13).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
121
LOGO! functions
Select the required function by means of the block number.
The timebase is configurable. For information on valid
ranges and parameter defaults, refer to Chapter 4.4.1.
Timing diagram
Trg
R
Q
Ta expires
T
T
The bold section of the timing diagram is also shown in the symbol of
the retentive on-delay.
Functional description
The 0 to 1 signal transition at input Trg triggers the current
time Ta . Output Q is set when Ta = T. A further signal at
input Trg does not influence the time Ta.
The output and the time Ta are reset with the next 1 signal
at input R.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are
reset after a power failure.
122
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.5
Wiping relay (pulse output)
Short description
An input pulse generates a signal with a configurable period at the output.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input Trg
A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the time for the
wiping relay function.
Parameter
The output is switched off
after the time T has expired
(output signal transition 1 to
0).
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
A signal at input Trg sets Q.
If the input signal = 1, output
Q remains set for the time
Ta.
Parameter T
Please note the information on parameter T in Chapter
4.3.2.
Timing diagram
The bold section of the timing diagram also appears in the symbol of
the wiping relay.
Trg
Q
Ta is expiring
T
T has not expired
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
123
LOGO! functions
Functional description
A 0 to 1 transition at input Trg sets the output, and triggers
a time Ta during which the output remains set.
Output Q is reset to lo (pulse output) when Ta reaches the
value preset at T (Ta = T).
The output is immediately reset if there is a 1 to 0 transition
at input Trg before the specified time has expired.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are
reset after a power failure.
124
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.6
Edge triggered wiping relay
Short description
An input pulse generates a preset number of output pulses
with a defined pulse/pause ratio (retriggerable), after a configured delay time has expired.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input Trg
A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the times for
the edge triggered wiping
relay.
Input R
A signal at input R resets
the current time (Ta) and the
output.
Parameter
The interpulse width TL and
the pulse width TH are configurable.
N determines the number of
pulse/pause cycles TL/TH:
Range of values: 1...9
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
Q is set after TL has expired, and reset after TH
has expired.
Parameter T
Please note the information on parameter T in
Chapter 4.3.2.
Timing diagram A
Trg
Q
Ta is running
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
TH
TH
N=1
TL=0
The bold section of the timing
diagram also appears in the
symbol of the edge triggered
wiping relay.
125
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram B
Trg
Timing diagram for the sample
configuration
Q
N=2
TL TH
TL TH
Functional description
A 0 to 1 transition at input Trg triggers the time TL (Time
Low). After the time TL has expired, output Q is set for the
duration of TH (Time High).
If there is a further 0 to 1 transition (retriggering pulse) at
input Trg before the preset time (TL + TH) has expired, Ta is
reset and the pulse/pause cycle is restarted.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the time are reset after
a power failure.
Preset of the Par parameter
View in programming mode (example):
B25
1+R
TL =02:00s
TH =03:00s
Protection mode and retentivity
Interpulse width
Pulse width
Press
B25
N =1
126
2
Number of pulse/pause cycles
(example)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
B25
TL =02:00s
TH =03:00s
Ta =01:15s
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Current pulse width TL or TH
127
LOGO! functions
4.4.7
Asynchronous pulse generator
Short description
The output pulse shape can be modified by reconfiguring
the pulse/pause ratio.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input En
You can use input EN to set
and reset the asynchronous
pulse generator.
Input INV
Input INV can be used to invert the output signal of the
active asynchronous pulse
generator.
Parameter
You can configure the pulse
width TH and the interpulse
width TL.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
Q is set and reset cyclically
according to the pulse/
pause ratio TH and TL.
Timing diagram
En
Inv
Q
TH
128
TL
TH
TL
TH
TH
TL
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Functional description
You can configure the pulse/interpulse width at the TH
(Time High) and TL (Time Low) parameters .
Input Inv can be used to invert the output signal, provided
the block is enabled with a signal at input EN.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are
reset after a power failure.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
129
LOGO! functions
4.4.8
Random generator
Short description
The output of the random generator is set or reset within a
configured time.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Input En
Description
A positive edge ( 0 to 1 transition) at input En (Enable)
triggers the on-delay time of
the random generator.
A negative edge ( 1 to 0
transition) at input En (Enable) triggers the off-delay
time of the random generator.
Parameter
The on-delay is set at random to a value between 0 s
and TH.
The off-delay is set at random to a value between 0 s
and TL.
Output Q
Output Q is set when the
on-delay has expired and if
En is still set. It is reset
when the off-delay has expired, provided En was not
set again meanwhile.
Parameter TH and TL
Note the defaults of the TH and TL parameters listed in
Chapter 4.3.2.
130
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram
En
The bold section of
the timing diagram
also appears in the
symbol of the random
generator.
Q
T is
busy
TH
TL
Functional description
The 0 to 1 transition at input En triggers a random on-delay
time between 0 s and TH. The output is set when the ondelay time has expired and if the signal at input En remains
hi at least for the duration of this time.
The time is reset if input En is reset before the on-delay
time has expired.
A 1 to 0 transition at input EN triggers a random on-delay
time between 0 s and TL.
The output is reset after the off-delay time has expired, provided input En remains lo at least for the duration of this
time.
The time is reset if the signal at input En changes to 1
again before the off-delay time has expired.
The time expired is reset after a power failure.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
131
LOGO! functions
4.4.9
Stairway lighting switch
Short description
An input edge triggers a configurable and retriggerable
time. The output is reset after this time has expired. A
warning signal can be output before this time has expired
to warn of the impending shutdown.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input Trg
A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the off-delay
time for the stairway lighting
switch.
Parameter
T represents the off-delay
time of the output (output
signal transition 1 to 0).
T! determines the triggering
time for the pre-warning.
T!L determines the length of
the pre-warning signal.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
Q is reset after the time T
has expired. A warning signal can be output before
this time has expired.
Timing diagram
Trg
Q
T!L
Ta is busy
T!
T
132
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Functional description
A 0 to 1 signal transition at input Trg sets output Q. The
next 1 to 0 transition at Trg retriggers the current time Ta,
and output Q remains set.
Output Q is reset when Ta = T. You can output a warning
signal before the off-delay time (T – T!) has expired to reset
Q for the time of the pre-warning period T!L.
A further one-shot at input Trg during Ta retriggers the time
Ta .
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are
reset after a power failure.
Preset of the Par parameter
Note the defaults specified in Chapter 4.3.2.
Note
All times must have the same timebase.
View in programming mode (example):
B9
1+R
T =60:00s
Protection mode and retentivity
Off-delay time
Press
B9
2
T! =05:00s
T!L =00:10s
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Start of the off-warning period
(T – T!)
Off-warning time
133
LOGO! functions
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
B9
1
T =60:00s
Ta =06:00s
134
Current value of T
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.10 Multiple function switch
Short description
Switch with two different functions:
Pulse switch with off-delay
Switch (permanent lighting)
Symbol in
LOGO!
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Wiring
Description
Input Trg
A signal at input Trg (Trigger) sets output Q (permanent light) or resets it with
off-delay. When active, output Q can be reset with a
signal at input Trg.
Input R
A signal at input R resets
the current time Ta and the
output.
Parameter
T represents the time after
which f the output is reset
(output signal transition
1 to 0).
TL represents the time during which the output must
be set to enable the permanent lighting function.
T! represents the preset
time for the start of the offwarning signal.
T!L represents the length of
the off-warning period.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
A signal at Trg switches on
output Q. Depending on the
length of the input at Trg,
the output is switched off
again or switched on permanently, or it is reset with a
further signal at Trg.
135
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram
Trg
TL
TL
Q
T!L
Ta is busy
T!
T
Functional description
A 0 to 1 transition at input Trg sets output Q.
If output Q = 0, and input Trg is set hi at least for the duration of TL, the permanent lighting function is enabled and
output Q is set accordingly.
The off-delay T is triggered when input Trg returns to 0 before TL has expired.
Output Q is reset when Ta = T.
You can output an off-warning signal prior to the expiration
of the off-delay time (T – T!), to reset Q for the duration of
the off-warning signal T!L. A further signal at Trg always
resets T and the output Q.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are
reset after a power failure.
Preset of the Par parameter
Note the defaults specified in Chapter 4.3.2.
Note
T, T! and T!L must all have the same timebase.
View in programming mode (example):
B5
1+R
T =60:00s
TL =10:00s
136
Protection mode and retentivity
Off-delay
Permanent light on-time
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Press
B5
2
T! =30:00s
T!L =20:00s
Start of the off-warning period
(T – T!)
Off-warning time
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
B5
1
T =60:00s
TL =10:00s
Ta =06:00s
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Current value of the time TL or T
137
LOGO! functions
4.4.11
Weekly timer
Short description
The output is controlled by means of a configurable on/off
date. The function supports any combination of weekdays.
You select the active weekdays by hiding the inactive days.
Note
Because the LOGO! 24/24o does not have a real-time
clock, the weekly timer function is not available for this version.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Cam
parameters
No1, No2, No3
At the Cam parameters, you
set the on- and off-times of
the weekly timer for each
Cam switch. Here you also
configure the days and the
time-of-day.
Output Q
Q is set when the configured cam is actuated.
Timing diagram (three examples)
Cam
1
21
1
1
1
1
3
1
3
Q
Monday
Wednesday
Friday
Sunday
Tuesday
Thursday
Saturday
Cam No1:
Cam No2:
Cam No3:
138
Daily:
06:30 h to 08:00 h
Tuesday:
03:10 h to 04:15 h
Saturday and Sunday: 16:30 h to 23:10 h
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Functional description
Each weekly timer has three cams you can use to configure a time hysteresis. You specify the on- and off-times at
the Cam parameters. The weekly timer sets the output at a
certain on-time, if this is not already set.
The weekly timer resets the output at a certain off-time, if it
is not switched off already. You will cause a conflict if the
on- and off-times you set for the weekly timer are identical,
though set on different cams. In this case, cam3 takes
priority over cam2, whereas cam2 takes priority over cam1.
The switching state of the weekly timer is determined by
the status of all three cams.
Parameter assignment screen form
View of the parameter assignment screen form, for example for Cam1:
Block B1
Cam No1
B1
1+
D=MTWTFSS
On =06:30
Off=08:00
See Showing/hiding parameters – Parameter protection
mode on page 72
Weekdays (daily)
On-time (06.30 h)
Off-time (08:00 h)
Weekday
The suffix of “D=” (Day) has the following meaning:
M:
Monday
T :
Tuesday
W:
Wednesday
T :
Thursday
F :
Friday
S :
Saturday
S :
Sunday
The uppercase letter indicates: A weekday is selected. A
“–” means: A weekday has not been selected.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
139
LOGO! functions
On-/Off-times
Possible is any time between 00:00 h and 23:59 h.
––:–– means: No on-/off-times set.
Setting the weekly timer
To set the on-/off-times:
1. Move the cursor to one of the Cam parameters of the
timer (e.g. No1).
2. Press OK. LOGO! opens the Cam parameter assignment screen form. The cursor is positioned on the weekday.
3. Press and to select one or several weekdays.
4. Press to move the cursor to the first position of the
on-time.
5. Set the on-time.
Modify the value at the respective position, using the
keys and . Move to the cursor to the various positions, using the keys and . At the first position, you
can only select the value ––:––
(––:–– means: No on-/off-times set).
6. Press to move the cursor to the first position of the
off-time.
7. Set the off-time (in same way as in step 5).
8. Confirm your entries with OK.
The cursor is now positioned on the No2 parameter
(Cam2) and you can configure a further cam.
Note
For information on timer accuracy, refer to the technical
data and to Chapter 4.3.2.
140
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Weekly timer: Example
The output of the weekly timer switch is to be set daily from
05:30 h to 07:40 h. The output should also be set every
Tuesday from 03:10 h to 04:15 h, and at the weekends
from 16:30 h to 23:10 h.
This requires three cams.
Here are the parameter assignment screen forms of the
cams No 1, 2 and 3, based on the timing diagram shown
earlier.
Cam1
Cam No1 must set the output of the weekly timer daily from
05:30 h to 07:40 h.
B1
1+
D=MTWTFSS
On =05:30
Off=07:40
Cam2
Cam No2 must set the output of the weekly timer every
Tuesday from 03:10 h to 04:15 h.
B1
2
D=–T–––––
On =03:10
Off=04:15
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
141
LOGO! functions
Cam3
Cam No3 must set the output of the weekly timer switch
every Saturday and Sunday from 16:30 h to 23:10 h.
B1
3
D=–––––SS
On =16:30
Off=23:10
Result
Cam
1
21
1
1
1
1
3
1
3
Q
Monday
Wednesday
Friday
Sunday
Tuesday
Thursday
Saturday
142
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.12 Yearly timer
Short description
The output is controlled by means of a configurable on/off
date.
Note
Because LOGO! 24/24o does not have a real-time clock,
the yearly timer is not available for this version.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Cam
parameter
At the Cam parameter, you
configure the on-/off-times
for the cam of the yearly
timer.
Output Q
Q is set when the configured cam is actuated.
Timing diagram
Feb.
Mar.
Apr.
MM.DD
On=02.20
Off=04.03
On
Off
February 20 at
00:00 h
April 3
at 00:00 h
Functional description
The yearly timer sets the output at a specific on-time, and
resets it at a specific off-time. The off-date identifies the day
on which the output is reset again. The first value identifies
the month, the second the day. For “MM” you can select a
placeholder (**), so that the on- and off-time is set for a
specific day each month.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
143
LOGO! functions
Sample configuration
The output of a LOGO! is to be set annually on March 1,
reset on April 4, set again on July 7, and reset again on
November 19. You need to configure two yearly timers with
corresponding on-times. The outputs are then logically
linked by means of an OR block
B1
+
MM–DD
On =03–01
Off=04–04
+
MM–DD
On =07–07
Off=11–19
On-time March 1
Off-time April 4
B2
In addition:
On-time July 7
Off-time November 19
Result
On
B1
B2
Off
March 1
at 00:00 h
July 7
at 00:00 h
April 4
at 00:00 h
144
November 19
at 00:00 h
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Further examples
B11
+
**–DD
On =**–01
Off=**–02
+
**–DD
On =**–10
Off=**–20
On-time is the first,
and off-time the second day each month.
B12
+
**–DD
On =**–25
Off=**–05
Each month, from the 10th through
to the 20th
B13
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
In the next month,
from the 25th through the 5th
145
LOGO! functions
4.4.13 Up/down counter
Short description
An input pulse increments or decrements an internal value,
depending on the parameter setting. The output is set or
reset when a configured threshold is reached. The direction
of count can be changed with a signal at input Dir.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input R
A signal at input R resets
both the internal count value
and the output to zero.
Input Cnt
The function counts the 0 to
1 transitions at input Cnt. 1
to 0 transitions are not
counted.
Use
inputs I5/I6 for highspeed counting (only
LOGO! 12/24 RC/RCo
and LOGO! 24/24o):
max. 2 kHz.
any other input or circuit
component for counting
low frequency signals
(5 Hz).
Input Dir
You set the direction of
count at input Dir:
Dir = 0: Up count
Dir = 1: Down count
146
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Parameter
Description
On: On threshold
Range of values:
0...999999
Off: Off threshold
Range of values:
0...999999
Retentivity for internal
counter value Cnt:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
Q is set or reset, depending
on the current value at Cnt
and the set thresholds.
Timing diagram
R
Cnt
Dir
On=Off=5
0
Internal
count value
Cnt
Q
Functional description
The internal counter increments (Dir = 0) or decrements
(Dir = 1) by one count with every positive edge at input Cnt.
You can use input R to reset the output and the internal
count value to ’000000’. As long as R = 1, the output is also
lo and the pulses at input Cnt are not counted.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are
reset after a power failure.
Q is set or reset depending on the current value at Cnt and
the set thresholds. See the calculation rule below.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
147
LOGO! functions
Calculation rule
If the On threshold Off threshold, then:
Q = 1, if Cnt On
Q = 0, if Cnt < Off.
If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1,
if On Cnt < Off.
Default on/off parameters
The default limits for the on and/or off parameters can be
derived from another, already programmed function. You
can use the actual values of the following functions:
Analog comparator (actual value Ax – Ay,
see Chapter 4.4.18)
Analog threshold trigger (actual value Ax, see Chapter
4.4.16)
Analog amplifier (actual value Ax, see Chapter 4.4.20)
and
Up/down counter (actual value Cnt).
Select the required function by means of the block number.
For information on parameter defaults,
refer to Chapter 4.4.1.
Note
The system scans the counter limit value cyclically.
Thus, if the pulse frequency at the fast inputs I5/I6 is faster
than the cycle time, the special function might not switch
until after the specified limit value is exceeded.
Example: Up to 100 pulses per cycle can be counted; 900
pulses have been counted so far. On = 950; Off = 10000.
The output is set in the next cycle, after the value has
reached 1000. (The output would not be set at all if the
value Off = 980.)
148
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
View in programming mode (example):
B3
+R
On =001234
Off=000000
or
B3
+R
On =123456
OffB021
If the referenced block (B6, in the example) returns a value
that lies out of the valid range, the value is rounded to the
next valid value.
The view in parameter assignment mode (example):
B3
On =001234
Off=000000
Cnt=000120
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
or
Current
count value
B3
On =123456
OffB021
Cnt=000120
149
LOGO! functions
4.4.14 Hours counter
Short description
A configured time is triggered with a signal at the monitoring input. The output is set when this time has expired.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input R
A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input R resets output Q
and sets a configured value MI
at the counter for the duration
of the time-to-go (MN).
Input En
En is the monitoring input.
LOGO! scans the on-time of
this input.
Input Ral
A positive edge at input Ral
(Reset all) resets both the
hours counter (OT) and the
output, and sets the configured
value MI at the counter to for
the duration of the time-to-go
(MN). That is,
output Q = 0,
measured operating time
OT = 0 and
the time-to-go of the maintenance interval
MN = MI.
150
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Parameter
Description
MI: Maintenance interval to be
preset in hour units
Range of values:
0000...9999 h
OT: Total operating time
Range of values:
00000...99999 h
Q0:
When “R” is selected:
Q = 1, if MN = 0;
Q = 0, if R = 1 or Ral = 1
When “R+En” is selected:
Q = 1, if MN = 0;
Q = 0, if R = 1 or Ral = 1
or En = 0.
Output Q
The output is set when the
time-to-go MN = 0.
The output is reset:
When “Q0:R+En”, if
R = 1 or Ral = 1 or En = 0
When “Q0:R”, if R = 1 or
Ral = 1.
MI = Configured time interval
MN= Time-to-go
OT= Total time expired since the last hi signal at input Ral
These values are always retentive!
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
151
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram
R
En
Ral
Q
MN=MI
Par:
MI=5h
MN=0
OT
MI = Configured time interval
MN = Time-to-go
OT = Total time expired since the last hi signal at input Ral
Functional description
The hours counter monitors input En. When En = 1, LOGO!
computes the time expired and the time-to-go MN. LOGO!
shows these times in parameter assignment mode. Output
Q is set when the time-to-go MN = 0.
A signal at reset input R resets output Q and sets the preset value of MI at the counter for the duration of MN. The
hours counter OT continues the count.
With a signal at the reset input Ral, you reset output Q and
set the preset value of MI at the counter for the duration of
MN. The hours counter OT is reset to zero.
Depending on your configuration of parameter Q, the output is either reset with a signal at input
R or Ral (”Q0:R”), or when a reset signal is set hi, or the
En signal is set lo (”Q0:R+En”).
152
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Viewing the MI, MN and OT values
LOGO! Basic with display unit: You can open the parameter assignment mode when the system is in RUN to
view the actual values of MI, MN and OT.
LOGO! Basic without display unit: In LOGO!Soft Comfort, you can use the Online Test to read these values
(for further information, see Chapter 7).
Limit value of OT
The value of the operating hours in OT are retained when
you reset the hours counter with a signal at input R. The
hours counter OT continues the count as long as En = 1,
irrespective of the status at the reset input R.
The counter limit of OT is 99999 h.
The hours counter stops when it reaches this value.
In programming mode, you can set the initial value of OT.
The counter starts operation at any value other than zero.
MN is automatically calculated at the START, based on the
MI and OT values
(Example: MI = 100, OT = 130, the result is MN = 70).
Preset of the Par parameter
View in programming mode:
B16
+
MI = 0100h
Q0:R+En
OT =00000h
or
Time expired
B16
+
MI = 0100h
Q0:R
OT =00000h
MI is the configurable time interval. Its permissible range of
values lies between 0 and 9999 hours.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
153
LOGO! functions
View in parameter assignment mode:
B16
MI = 0100h
MN = 0017h
OT =00083h
154
Time interval
Time-to-go
Total operating hours
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.15 Threshold trigger
Short description
The output is set and reset with two configurable threshold
triggers.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input Fre
Fre
The function counts the 0 to 1
transitions at input Fre. 1 to 0
transitions are not counted.
Use
inputs I5/I6 for high-speed
counting (only LOGO!
12/24 RC/RCo and LOGO!
24/24o): max. 2 kHz.
any other input or circuit
component for counting low
frequency signals (5 Hz).
Parameter
On: On threshold
Range of values:
0000...9999
Off: Off threshold
Range of values:
0000...9999
G_T: Time interval or gate time
during which the input
pulses are measured.
Range of values:
00:05 s...99:99 s
Output Q
Q is set and reset at the
thresholds.
Timing diagram
Q
G_T
Fre
fa = 9
fa = 10
fa = 8
fa = 4
On = 9
Off = 5
fa = Input frequency
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
155
LOGO! functions
Functional description
The threshold trigger measures the signals at input Fre.
The pulses are recorded across a configurable time G_T.
Output Q is set and reset in accordance with the set thresholds. See the calculation rule below.
Calculation rule
If the On threshold Off threshold, then:
Q = 1, if fa > On
Q = 0, if fa Off.
If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1 if
On fa < Off.
Preset of the Par parameter
Note
The system scans the counter limit value once per interval
G_T.
View in programming mode (example):
B15
1+
On =0009
Off =0005
Parameter protection mode
On threshold
Off threshold
Press
B15
2
G_T=01:00s
156
Time interval for pulses
(example)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Note
The “seconds” timebase is here set as permanent default.
When you preset a time G_T of 1 s, the LOGO! returns the
current frequency in parameter fa in Hz.
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
B15
On =0009
Off =0005
fa =0010
On threshold
Off threshold
Q = 1 (fa > On)
Note
fa always represents the total pulses measured per time
unit G_T.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
157
LOGO! functions
4.4.16 Analog threshold trigger
Short description
The output is set and reset at two configurable thresholds.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Input Ax
Description
You apply the analog signal
to be analyzed at input Ax.
Use the analog inputs
AI1...AI8 (*), the analog
flags AM1...AM6, the block
number of a function with
analog output, or the analog
outputs AQ1 and AQ2.
Parameter
A: Gain
Range of values:
00.00...10.00
B: Zero offset
Range of values:
10.000
On: On threshold
Range of values:
20.000
Off: Off threshold
Range of values:
20.000
p:
Output Q
*
158
Number of decimals
Range of values:
0, 1, 2, 3
Q is set or reset by the
threshold triggers.
AI1...AI8: 0...10 V corresponds with 0...1000 (internal value).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Gain and offset parameters
Please note the information on gain and offset parameters
in Chapter 4.3.6.
Parameter p (number of decimals)
Does not apply to the display of On, Off and Ax values in a
message text.
Does not apply to the comparison of On and Off values!
(The compare function ignores the decimal point.)
Timing diagram
1000
On
Off
Ax
0
Q
Functional description
The function fetches the analog signal at input Ax.
Ax is multiplied by the value of the A (gain) parameter, and
the value at parameter B (offset) is added to product, i.e.
(Ax gain) + offset = actual value of Ax.
Output Q is set or reset, depending on the set thresholds.
See the calculation rule below.
Calculation rule
If the On threshold Off threshold, then:
Q = 1, if the actual value Ax > On
Q = 0, if the actual value Ax Off.
If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1 if
On actual value Ax < Off.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
159
LOGO! functions
Preset of the Par parameter
The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application.
View in programming mode (example):
B3
1+
On =+04000
Off =+02000
Parameter protection mode
On threshold
Off threshold
Press
B3
2
A =01.00
B =+00000
p =2
Gain
Offset
Decimals in the message text
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
B3
On =+04000
Off =+02000
Ax =+05000
On threshold
Off threshold
Q = 1 (Ax > On)
View in the message text (example):
+050.00
Ax, when p = 2
Q = 1 (Ax > On)
160
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.17 Analog differential trigger
Short description
The output is set and reset depending on a configurable
threshold and a differential value.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Input Ax
Description
You apply the analog signal
to be analyzed at input Ax.
Use the analog inputs
AI1...AI8 (*), the analog
flags AM1...AM6, the block
number of a function with
analog output, or the analog
outputs AQ1 and AQ2.
Parameter
A: Gain
Range of values:
00.00...10.00
B: Zero offset
Range of values:
10.000
On: On/Off threshold
Range of values:
20.000
: Differential value for
calculating the off
parameter
Range of values:
20.000
p:
Output Q
*
Number of decimals
Range of values:
0, 1, 2, 3
Q is set or reset, depending
on the threshold and difference values.
AI1...AI8: 0...10 V corresponds with 0...1000 (internal value).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
161
LOGO! functions
Gain and offset parameters
Please note the information on gain and offset parameters
in Chapter 4.3.6.
Parameter p (number of decimals)
Does not apply to the display of On, Off and Ax values in a
message text.
Timing diagram A: Function with negative difference O
n
Off = On + Ax
Q
Timing diagram B: Function with positive difference Off = On + On
Ax
Q
Functional description
The function fetches the analog signal at input Ax.
Ax is multiplied by the value of the A (gain) parameter, and
the value at parameter B (offset) is added to product, i.e.
(Ax gain) + offset = actual value of Ax.
Output Q is set or reset, depending on the set (On) threshold and difference value (). The function automatically
calculates the Off parameter: Off = On + , whereby may be positive or negative. See the calculation rule below.
162
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Calculation rule
When you set a negative differential value , the On
threshold Off threshold, and:
Q = 1, if the actual value Ax > On
Q = 0, if the actual value Ax Off.
See the timing diagram A.
When you set a positive differential value , the On
threshold < the Off threshold, and Q = 1, if:
On actual value Ax < Off.
See the timing diagram B.
Preset of the Par parameter
The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application.
View in programming mode (example):
B3
1+
On =+04000
=–02000
Parameter protection mode
On/off threshold
Differential value for the on/off
threshold
Press
B3
2
A =01.00
B =+00000
p =2
Gain
Offset
Decimals in the message text
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
B3
On =+04000
=–02000
Ax =+05000
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
On threshold
Differential value for the
off threshold
Q = 1 (Ax > On)
163
LOGO! functions
Press
B3
Off =+02000
164
Off threshold
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.18 Analog comparator
Short description
The output is set and reset, depending on the difference
Ax – Ay and on two configurable thresholds.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Inputs Ax and
Ay
Description
You apply the analog signals whose difference you
want to analyze at the inputs Ax and Ay.
Use the analog inputs
AI1...AI8 (*), the analog
flags AM1...AM6, the block
number of a function with
analog output, or the analog
outputs AQ1 and AQ2.
Parameter
A: Gain
Range of values:
00.00...10.00
B: Zero offset
Range of values:
10.000
On: On threshold
Range of values:
20.000
Off: Off threshold
Range of values:
20.000
p:
Output Q
*
Number of decimals
Range of values:
0, 1, 2, 3
Q is set or reset, depending
on the difference Ax – Ay
and the set thresholds..
AI1...AI8: 0...10 V corresponds with 0...1000 (internal value).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
165
LOGO! functions
Gain and offset parameters
For more information on the gain and offset parameters,
refer to Chapter 4.3.6.
Parameter p (number of decimals)
Does not apply to Ax, Ay, On, Off and values displayed
in a message text.
Does not apply to the comparison of on and off values!
(The compare function ignores the decimal point.)
Timing diagram
1000
Ax
0
1000
Ay
0
1000
Ax–Ay
200
0
Q
for Ax - Ay > 200,
if On = Off = 200
Functional description
The function fetches the analog values from the inputs Ax
and Ay.
Ax and Ay are each multiplied by the value of the A (gain)
parameter, and the value at parameter B (offset) is then
added to the relevant product, i.e.
(Ax gain) + offset = actual value Ax or
(Ay gain) + offset = actual value Ay.
The function forms the difference (””) between the actual
values Ax – Ay.
Output Q is set or reset, depending on difference of the
actual values Ax – Ay and the set thresholds. See the calculation rule below.
166
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Calculation rule
If the On threshold Off threshold, then:
Q = 1, if:
(actual value Ax – actual value Ay) > On
Q = 0, if:
(actual value Ax – actual value Ay) Off.
If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1, if:
On (actual value Ax – actual value Ay) < Off.
Preset of the Par parameter
The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application.
View in programming mode:
B3
1+
On =+00000
Off =+00000
Parameter protection mode
On threshold
Off threshold
Press
B3
2
A =00.00
B =+00000
p =0
Gain
Offset
Decimals in the message text
Example
In a heating control system, the supply Tv and return line
temperatures Tr are to be compared, for example with a
sensor at AI2.
A control signal is to be triggered (for example ”heater
On”), when the difference between the supply and return
line temperatures is greater than 15 . The control signal is
reset when the difference is less than 5 C.
The process variable of the temperature is to be shown in
parameter assignment mode.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
167
LOGO! functions
The thermocouples available have the the following technical data: –30 to +70C, 0 to 10 VDC.
Application
Internal mapping
–30 to +70 C = 0 to 10 V DC 0 to 1000
0 C
300
Offset = –30
Range of values:
1000
–30 to +70 C = 100
Gain = 100/1000 = 0.1
On threshold = 15 C
Threshold = 15
Off threshold = 5 C
Threshold = 5
See also Chapter 4.3.6.
Configuration (example):
B3
1+
On =+00015
Off =+00005
Protection mode
On threshold
Off threshold
Press
B3
2
A =00.10
B =–00030
p =0
Gain
Offset
Decimals in the message text
(if used)
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
B3
1
On =+00015
Off =+00005
168
On threshold
Off threshold
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Press
B3
2
Ax =+00010
Ay =–00020
=+00030
Temperature values
Q = 1 (differential value > On)
View in the message text (example):
Ax =+00010
Ay =–00020
Reducing the input response of the analog comparator
You can selectively delay the output of an analog comparator by means of the “On-delay” and “Off-delay” special
functions. With on-delay, output Q is only set if the pulse
width of the triggering signal at input Trg ( =analog
comparator output) is longer than the on-delay time. With
off-delay, output Q is only reset if the pulse width of the triggering signal at input Trg is longer than the off-delay time.
Using this method, you will obtain a virtual hysteresis and
reduce the input response to short signals.
Function block diagram
AI1
AI
AI2
AI
Analog comparator
B1
On-delay
A
B2
Off-delay
B3
Q1
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
169
LOGO! functions
4.4.19 Analog value monitoring
Short description
This special function saves the process variable of an analog input to memory, and sets the output when the output
variable exceeds or drops below this stored value plus a
configurable offset.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input En
A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input En saves the analog value at input Ax (”Aen”) to
memory and starts monitoring
of the analog range Aen .
Input Ax
You apply the analog signal to
be monitored at input Ax.
Use the analog inputs AI1...AI8
(*), the analog flags
AM1...AM6, the block number
of a function with analog output, or the analog outputs AQ1
and AQ2.
Parameter
A: Gain
Range of values:
00.00...10.00
B: Zero offset
Range of values: 10.000
: Difference value for the
Aen on/off threshold
Range of values: 20.000
p:
Output Q
*
170
Number of decimals
Range of values:
0, 1, 2, 3
Q is set/reset, depending on
the stored analog value and
the offset.
AI1...AI8: 0...10 V corresponds with 0...1000 (internal value).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Gain and offset parameters
For more information on gain and offset parameters, refer
to Chapter 4.3.6.
Parameter p (number of decimals)
Applies only to the Aen, Ax and values displayed in a
message text.
Timing diagram
En
Aen + Aen
Aen – Ax
Q
Functional description
A 0 to 1 transition at input En saves the value of the signal
at the analog input Ax. This saved process variable is referred to as “Aen”.
Both the analog actual values Ax and Aen are multiplied by
the value at parameter A (gain), and parameter B (offset) is
then added to the product, i.e.
(Ax gain) + offset = Actual value Aen, when input En
changes from 0 to 1, or
(Ax gain) + offset = Actual value Ax.
Output Q is set when the signal at input En = 1 and if the
actual value at input Ax is out of range of Aen .
Output Q is reset, when the actual value at input Ax lies
within the range of Aen , or when the signal at input
En changes to lo.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
171
LOGO! functions
Preset of the Par parameter
The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the used
sensors to the respective application.
View in programming mode:
B3
1+
=00000
Parameter protection mode
Differential value for the
on/off threshold
Press
B3
2
A =00.00
B =+00000
p =0
Gain
Offset
Decimals in the message text
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
B3
=00010
Aen =–00020
Ax =+00005
172
Q = 1 (Ax is out of the range of
Aen )
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.20 Analog amplifier
Short description
This special function amplifies the value of an analog input
and outputs the result at an analog output.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Input Ax
Description
You apply the analog signal to
be amplified at input Ax.
Use the analog inputs AI1...AI8
(*), the analog flags
AM1...AM6, the block number
of a function with analog output, or the analog outputs AQ1
and AQ2.
Parameter
A: Gain
Range of values:
00.00...10.00
B: Zero offset
Range of values: 10.000
p:
Output AQ
*
Number of decimals
Range of values:
0, 1, 2, 3
This special function has an
analog output! This output can
only be connected with the
analog input of a function or
with an analog flag.
Range of values for AQ:
–32768...+32767
AI1...AI8: 0...10 V corresponds with 0...1000 (internal value).
Gain and offset parameters
Please note the information on gain and offset parameters
in Chapter 4.3.6.
Parameter p (number of decimals)
Applies only to the AQ value in a message text.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
173
LOGO! functions
Functional description
The function fetches the analog signal of input Ax.
This value is multiplied by the value of the A (gain) parameter, and parameter B (offset) is then added to the product,
i.e. (Ax gain) + offset = actual value Ax.
The actual value Ax is output at AQ.
Preset of the Par parameter
The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application.
View in programming mode (example):
B3
+
A =02.50
B =–00300
p =0
Gain
Offset
Decimals in the message text
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
B3
AQ =–00250
174
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.21 Latching relay
Short description
Input S sets output Q, input R resets output Q again.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input S
You set output Q with a signal at input S.
Input R
You reset output Q with a
signal at input R. If S and
R = 1, the output is reset.
Parameter
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
Q is set with a signal at input S, and reset with a signal at input R.
Timing diagram
R
S
Q
Switching response
A latching relay represents a simple binary element. The
output value depends on the status at the inputs and on the
previous output status. The following table shows the logic
once again:
Sn
Rn
Q
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
x
0
1
0
Comment
The status is retentive
Reset
Set
Reset (takes priority over Set)
When retentivity is enabled, the current status of the output
signal is retained after a power failure.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
175
LOGO! functions
4.4.22 Pulse relay
Short description
A short pulse at the input sets and resets the output.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input Trg
You set and reset output Q
with a signal at input Trg
(Trigger).
Input S
You set output Q with a signal at input S.
Input R
You reset output Q with a
signal at input R.
Parameter
Selection:
RS (R input priority) or
SR (S input priority)
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
Q is set with a signal at Trg,
and reset with the next signal at Trg, if S and R = 0.
Timing diagram
Trg
S
The bold printed section of the
timing diagram is also shown in
the symbol for the pulse relay.
R
Q
176
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Functional description
Output Q changes its status, i.e. the output is set or reset,
with each 0 to 1 transition at input Trg and if the inputs S
and R = 0.
The signal at input Trg does not influence the special function when S or R = 1.
You set the pulse relay with a signal at input S, i.e. the output is set hi.
You reset the pulse relay with a signal at input R, i.e. the
output is set lo.
Status diagram
Par
Qn–1
S
R
Trg
Qn
*
0
0
0
0
0
*
0
0
0
0 –>1
1**
*
0
0
1
0
0
*
0
0
1
0 –>1
0
*
0
1
0
0
1
*
0
1
0
0 –>1
1
RS
0
1
1
0
0
RS
0
1
1
0 –>1
0
SR
0
1
1
0
1
SR
0
1
1
0 –>1
1
*
1
0
0
0
1
*
1
0
0
0 –>1
0**
*
1
0
1
0
0
*
1
0
1
0 –>1
0
*
1
1
0
0
1
*
1
1
0
0 –>1
1
RS
1
1
1
0
0
RS
1
1
1
0 –>1
0
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
177
LOGO! functions
Par
Qn–1
S
R
Trg
Qn
SR
1
1
1
0
1
SR
1
1
1
0 –>1
1
*: RS or SR
**: Triggering signal is effective, because S and R = 0.
Depending on your configuration, either input R takes priority over input S (i.e. input S is not effective when R = 1), or
vice versa (i.e. input R is not effective when S = 1).
After a power failure, the pulse relay and output Q are reset
if you have not enabled retentivity.
View in programming mode:
B29
Par=RS
R
Press
or B29
Par=SR
R
This special function is not available in parameter assignment mode.
Note
If Trg = 0 and Par = RS, the special function “Pulse relay”
corresponds with the special function “Latching relay” (see
Chapter 4.4.21).
178
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
4.4.23 Message texts
Short description
View of a configured message text in RUN mode.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input En
A 0 to 1 transition at input
En (Enable) starts the output of the message text.
Input P
P: Priority of the message
text
Range of values: 0...30
Quit: Acknowledgment of
the message text.
Parameter
Text: Input of the message
text
Par:Parameter or actual value of another, already
programmed function
(see “Visible parameters or process variables”)
Time: Display of the continuously updated time-ofday
Date: Display of the continuously updated date
EnTime: Display of the time
of the 0 to 1 transition
of the signal at input En
EnDate: Display of the date
of the 0 to 1 transition
of the signal at input En
Output Q
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Q remains set as long as
the message text is set.
179
LOGO! functions
Restriction
A maximum of 10 message text functions are available.
Functional description
With the 0 to 1 transition of the signal at input En and when
the system is in RUN, the message text you have configured (process variable, text, time-of-day, date) is output to
the display.
Acknowledgment disabled (Quit = Off):
The message text is hidden when the status of the signal at
input En changes from 1 to 0.
Acknowledgment enabled (Quit = On):
When the status of the signal at input En changes from 1 to
0, the message text is output until it is acknowledged with
OK. When En = 1, you can not acknowledge the message
text.
When multiple message text functions are triggered with
En=1, the message text that has the highest priority is
shown (0 = lowest, 30 = highest). This also means, that a
newly activated message text is shown only if its priority is
higher than that of previously activated message texts.
After a message text is disabled or acknowledged, the
function automatically shows the previously active message text that takes the highest priority.
You can change the view and the message texts by pressing the keys and .
180
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Example
This is how tow message texts could be shown:
Display field of the LOGO! in RUN mode
Motor 5
STOP AT
10:12
!!Action!!
Example: Message text with
priority 30
Key
Motor 2
3000
hours
MAINTENANCE!
Example: Message text with
priority 10
Press
Mo 09:00
2003-01-27
Date and current time-of-day
(only for versions with real-time
clock).
Input P configuration
To configure the priority and the acknowledgment (programming mode):
B33
+
Priority
00
Quit=Off
“+” means: The parameters and actual
values in an active message text can be
edited
Priority
Status of the acknowledgment
1. Increase the priority to 1:
2. Change to ’Quit’:
3. Enable ’Quit’:
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Cursor on ’0’ +
Press
Press or
181
LOGO! functions
LOGO! shows:
B33
+
Priority
01
Quit=On
Priority 1
Status of acknowledgment ’On’
4. Confirm the entries with
OK
Visible parameters or process variables
The following parameter or process variables can be displayed in a message text:
Special function
Parameter or process variable visible in a message
text
Times
On-delay
T, Ta
Off-delay
T, Ta
On-/Off-delay
Ta, TH, TL
Retentive on-delay
T, Ta
Wiping relay
(pulse output)
T, Ta
Edge triggered
wiping relay
Ta, TH, TL
Asynchronous pulse generator
Ta, TH, TL
Random generator
TH , T L
Stairway lighting switch
Ta, T, T!, T!L
Multiple function switch
Ta, T, TL, T!, T!L
Weekly timer
3*on/off/day
Yearly timer
On, Off
Counter
182
Up/down counter
Cnt, On, Off
Hours counter
MI, Q, OT
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Special function
Threshold trigger
Parameter or process variable visible in a message
text
fa, On, Off, G_T
Analog
Analog threshold trigger
On, Off, A, B, Ax
Analog differential trigger
On, , A, B, Ax, Off
Analog comparator
On, Off, A, B, Ax, Ay, A
Analog value monitoring
, A, B, Ax, Aen
Analog amplifier
A, B, Ax
Miscellaneous
Latching relay
–
Pulse relay
–
Message texts
–
Softkey
On/Off
Shift register
–
Changing parameters in the active message text
You can allow editing of parameter and process variables in
an active message text by entering a “+” in the first line. To
prevent changes, enter a “–” sign.
When the message text is active, press ESC to select the
editing mode.
Note
You must keep the ESC key pressed at least for one second.
Press and to select the relevant line (you can only select lines that contain parameters). Press OK to change the
parameter. Use the keys , , and .
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
183
LOGO! functions
Confirm your changes with OK. You can now edit further
parameters in the message text (if any exist). Press ESC to
exit editing mode.
Key input simulation in the active message text
You can enable the four cursor keys C , C , C and
C in an active message text by pressing ESC plus the
relevant cursor key.
Preset of the Par parameter
To configure the message text (programming mode):
..
..
..
..
Parameter assignment
screen form for Par
Press to select a line for the message text.
Press and to select the relevant type of message text
(Text, Par, Time...). Confirm with OK.
Further entries are required when “Text” or “Par” are selected:
Press and to select the letter to be displayed in the
text. To move the cursor from one position to the other,
press and .
The list of available characters is here the same as for the
circuit program name. The character set is found in Chapter 3.6.4.
Press OK to confirm your changes, and press ESC to exit
the editing mode.
To output a parameter (e.g. a process variable or function
value) as message text, select the relevant line with and
then press :
Par
..
..
..
184
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Press OK to open the editing mode:
B01>T
Press and to select the blocks to be displayed and the
corresponding parameters.
Press and to select the block or parameter you want to
view.
Select the parameter by pressing OK.
Press ESC to exit the parameter assignment mode and to
apply your changes.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
185
LOGO! functions
4.4.24 Softkey
Short description
This special function has the effect of a mechanical pushbutton or switch.
Symbol in
LOGO!
En
Par
Wiring
Description
Input En
Output Q is set with a 0 to 1
transition of the signal at input En (Enable), and if
’Switch=On’ was confirmed
in parameter assignment
mode.
Parameter
Programming mode:
Selecting the function for
pushbutton action for the
duration of one cycle, or for
switching action.
Q
Start: On or off state, initialized at the first start of
the program if retentivity is disabled.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Parameter assignment
mode (RUN mode):
Switch: Switches the momentary pushbutton or
switch on or off.
Output Q
Switches on if En=1 and
Switch=On was confirmed
with OK.
Factory setting
The default setting at ’Par’ is ’Momentary pushbutton’
action.
186
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Timing diagram
En
Switch
Q
Functional description
In parameter assignment mode, the output is set with a signal at input En, if the ’’Switch’ parameter is set to ’On’ and
confirmed with OK. Whether the function was configured
for pushbutton or switching action is here of no concern.
The output is reset to ’0’ in the following three cases:
After a 0 to 1 transition at input En.
When the function was configured for momentary pushbutton action, and one cycle has expired since it was
switched on.
When the position ’Off’ was selected at the ’Switch’ parameter and confirmed with OK in parameter assignment mode.
If retentivity is not set, output Q is initialized after a power
failure according to your configuration at the “Start” parameter.
Preset of the Par parameter
View in programming mode (example):
1. Select the ’Softkey’ function.
2. Select input En and confirm with OK. The cursor is now
positioned below ’Par’.
3. Change to the input mode of ’Par’:
Confirm with OK
(the cursor is now positioned to ’On’)
B33
+/
On=
Start=On
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
The status is not retentive
The function is set for ’momentary
pushbutton’ action
Q is set in the first cycle after the
program start
187
LOGO! functions
To change ’Par’ to ’Switch’ action and the initialization status after the program start:
4. To select ’Momentary pushbutton’ or ’Switch’ action:
Press or
B33
+/
On/Off
Start=On
The status is not retentive
’Switch’ function
Q is set in the first cycle after the
program start
5. To change to the start state:
6. To change the start state:
B33
+/
On/Off
Start=Off
Press
Press
or
or
The status is not retentive
’Switch’function
Q is reset in the init cycle after the
program start
7. Confirm your entries with
OK
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
Here, you can set or reset the ’Switch’ parameter (On/Off).
When in RUN, the LOGO! shows the following display:
B33
Switch=Off
The pushbutton/switch is here
switched off
Let us assume you want to set ’Switch’ (On).
1. Change to the editing mode:
Confirm with OK
(the cursor is now positioned on ’Off’)
2. To change from ’Off’ to ’On’:
Press or
3. Confirm your entries with
Press OK
188
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
B33
Switch=On
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
The momentary pushbutton/switch
is here switched on
189
LOGO! functions
4.4.25 Shift register
Short description
You can use the shift register function to read the value of
an input and to shift its bits left or right. The output value
corresponds with the configured shift register bit. The shifting direction can be changed at a special input.
Symbol in
LOGO!
Wiring
Description
Input In
Input read at the start of the
function.
Input Trg
A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input Trg (Trigger)
starts the special function.
1 to 0 transitions are irrelevant.
Input Dir
The signal at input Dir determines the shifting direction for the shift register bits
S1...S8 an:
Dir = 0: Shift up (S1 >> S8)
Dir = 1: Shift down (S8 >>
S1)
Parameter
Shift register bit that determines the value at output Q.
Possible settings:
S1 ... S8
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Output Q
190
The output value corresponds with the configured
shift register bit.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! functions
Functional description
The function reads the value at input In with a positive edge
(0 to 1 transition) at input Trg (Trigger).
This value is applied to shift register bit S1 or S8, depending on the shifting direction:
Shift up: The value at input In is set at S1; the previous
value at S1 is shifted to S2; the previous value at S2 is
shifted to S3 etc.
Shift down: The value at input In is set at S8; the previous value at S8 is shifted to S7; the previous value at
S7 is shifted to S6 etc.
Output Q returns the value of the configured shift register
bit.
If retentivity is disabled, the shift function restarts at S1 or
S8 after a power failure. When enabled, retentivity always
applies to all shift register bits.
Note
The special function shift register can be used only once in
the circuit program.
Timing diagram
In
Trg
Q
Dir
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
Shift up
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
S4 = Q (example)
Shift down
191
LOGO! functions
Preset of the Par parameter
View in programming mode:
B3
Q=S8
R
Retentivity enabled
Preset
Press
B3
Q=S7
R
etc. You can select S8...S1.
This special function is not available in parameter assignment mode.
192
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
5 Configuring LOGO!
When speaking of ’parameter assignment’, we refer to the
configuration of the block parameters. You can set delay
times for time functions, the switching times of the timers,
the counter threshold value, the monitoring interval of an
hours counter and the on and off thresholds of the trigger.
You can configure the parameters
In programming mode
In parameter assignment mode
In programming mode, the author of the circuit program
also sets the parameters.
We have added the parameter assignment mode to allow
the editing of parameters without having to modify the circuit program. This feature is available for the user to edit
parameters, without having to change to programming
mode, for example. The advantage: The circuit program
remains protected, but can be adapted by the user to meet
specific requirements.
Note
In parameter assignment mode, the LOGO! continues execution of the circuit program.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
193
Configuring LOGO!
5.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode
Press ESC to change from RUN to parameter assignment
mode:
Mo 09:00
2003-01-27
... Press
ESC
Note
The following applies to earlier device versions up to
0BA2:
You open parameter assignment mode by pressing
ESC+OK.
LOGO! changes to parameter assignment mode and opens
the parameter assignment menu:
>Stop
Set Param
Set Clock
Prg Name
194
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Configuring LOGO!
Description of the four menu items of the parameter assignment
menu
Stop
You select this command to stop your circuit program and
thus change to the main menu of programming mode. To
do so:
1. To move the ’>’ cursor to ’Stop’:
Press or
2. To confirm ’Stop’:
Press OK
Stop Prg
>No
Yes
3. To move the ’>’ cursor to ’Yes’:
Press or
4. To confirm ’Yes’:
Press OK
LOGO! shows the main menu of the programming mode:
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
Set Param
For information on the various parameters, refer to the
Chapters 5.1.1 to 5.1.3.
Set clock
The ’Set Clock’ command is only executed if your LOGO! is
equipped with a real-time clock (LOGO!..C). You set the
real-time clock of LOGO! by means of the ’Set Clock’ command. For details, refer to Chapter 5.2.
Prg Name
This menu command only allows you to read the name of
your circuit program. It is not possible to modify this name
in parameter assignment mode. (see Chapter 3.6.4.)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
195
Configuring LOGO!
5.1.1 Parameters
Note
In the following discourse on parameters, we presume that
the respective default parameter protection mode (”+”) has
been maintained. This is prerequisite for viewing and editing parameter in the parameter assignment mode!
See Chapter 4.3.5 and the example on Page 72.
Parameters are, for example:
The delay times of a timer relay.
The switching times (cams) of a timer switch.
Counter thresholds
The monitoring time for hour counters
The trigger thresholds.
Each one of the parameters is identified by its block number (Bx) and the shortname of the parameter. Examples:
T:
...is a configurable time.
MI: ...is a configurable time interval.
Note
LOGO!Soft Comfort also allows you to assign names to
blocks (for more information, refer to Chapter 7).
196
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Configuring LOGO!
5.1.2 Selecting the parameters
To select a parameter:
1. On the parameter assignment menu, select
’Set Param’:
Press
or
Stop
>Set Param
Set Clock
Prg Name
2. Confirm with OK.
LOGO! shows the first parameter. If no parameter can
be set, you can press ESC to return to the parameter
assignment menu.
Block number
B9
1
T =60:00s
Display number for functions with
several displays
Ta =06:00s
The current time in the
LOGO!
No Param
Press ESC
No parameters for editing:
Press ESC to return to the paramete
ment menu
The value set at parameter T (Time)
3. Now, select the desired parameter:
Press or .
4. Select the parameter you want to edit, and press OK.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
197
Configuring LOGO!
5.1.3 Modifying parameters
You first select the parameter you want to edit (see Chapter
5.1.2).
You change the value of the parameter in the same way as
you did in programming mode:
1. Move the cursor to the point at which you want to make
the change:
Press or
2. To change this value:
Press or
3. To apply the value:
OK
B9
T =80:00s
Ta =06:00s
Change: Press or Move: Press or Done: OK
Note
Alongside with a change of the time parameters when the
system is in RUN, you can also change the timebase (s =
seconds, m = minutes, h = hours). This does not apply if
the time parameter represents the result of another function (for an example, see Chapter 4.4.1). In this case you
can neither change the value nor the timebase.
The current time is reset to zero when you change the
timebase.
Current value of a time T
View of a time T in parameter assignment mode:
B9
T =80:00s
Configured time T
Ta =06:00s
Current time Ta
You can change the configured time T.
198
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Configuring LOGO!
Current timer value
View of a timer cam in parameter assignment mode:
B1
1
D=M–W–F––
On = 09:00
Off=10:00
You can change the on/off times and the day.
Current value of a counter
View of a counter parameter in parameter assignment
mode:
B3
On =001234
Off=000000
Cnt=000120
or
Current
count value
B3
On =123456
OffB021
Cnt=000120
You can change the on/off threshold. This does not apply if
the on or off threshold represents the result of another
function (in the example, this is B21, see Chapter 4.4.13).
Current value of an hour counter
View of an hour counter parameter in parameter assignment mode:
B16
MI = 0100h
MN = 0017h
OT =00083h
Time interval
Time-to-go
Total operating hours
You can edit the configured time interval MI.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
199
Configuring LOGO!
Current value of a threshold trigger
View of the parameter of a threshold trigger in parameter
assignment mode:
B15
On =0009
Off =0005
fa =0010
On threshold
Off threshold
Process variable
You can change the on/off threshold.
200
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Configuring LOGO!
5.2 Setting the time-of-day and date
(LOGO! ... C)
You can set the TOD and the date
In parameter assignment mode
In programming mode.
To set the TOD and the date in parameter assignment mode:
1. Select parameter assignment mode. (see Chapter 5.1.)
2. On the parameter menu, select ’Set Clock’
(Press or ), and then press OK.
Set Clock
Mo 15:30
YYYY-MM-DD
2003-01-27
The cursor is positioned
on the weekday.
3. Select the day of the week:
Press or
4. Move the cursor to the next position:
Press or
5. To change the value:
Press or
6. To set the correct TOD, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7. To set the correct date, repeat steps 4 and 5
8. To confirm your entries:
Press OK
To set the TOD and the date in programming mode:
1. Select programming mode (ESC / >Stop). (see Chapter
3.6.1.)
2. On the main menu, select ’Clock..’
(Press or ),
and then press OK.
3. Go to the clock menu, and select ’Set Clock’
(Press or ), and the press OK.
You can now set the weekday and the time as described
earlier (as of step 3.).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
201
Configuring LOGO!
202
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
6 LOGO! program module (card)
LOGO! allows you to store only one circuit program in its
memory. If you want to modify the circuit program or create
a further one without deleting the first, you must archive it
somewhere. One of the options is to use a program module/card.
The circuit program stored in LOGO! can be copied to a
program module (card). You can then insert the program
module/card in another LOGO! to copy the circuit program.
using the program module (card), you can:
Archiving circuit programs
Reproducing circuit programs
Send circuit programs by mail
Write and test your circuit program at the office, and
then transfer it to a LOGO! in the switching cabinet.
LOGO! is supplied with a hood. The program module (card)
is supplied separately.
Note
You do not need a module to backup the circuit program in
your LOGO!.
The LOGO! circuit program is automatically stored in nonvolatile memory when you exit the programming mode.
We shall now introduce the program module (Card) you
can order for LOGO! The card can backup all data in the
LOGO! circuit program memory.
The order number is found in the appendix.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
203
LOGO! program module (card)
Compatibility
... to current versions (0BA4 devices):
Data written to the program module (card) in a 0BA4 version can be read in all other 0BA4 versions.
... to earlier versions (0BA0 to 0BA3 devices):
A program module (card) that contains data written in earlier versions (0BA0...0BA3 devices) can not be used in
LOGO! devices of the 0BA4 generation. When the LOGO!
system detects such an ’old’ program module (card), the
message “Unknown Card / Press ESC” is output to the display.
Vice versa, an 0BA4 program module (card) can not be
used in LOGO! devices of the 0BA0...0BA3 family.
Upward compatibility of circuit programs
Circuit programs written for the previous versions
0BA0...0BA3 can only be applied in 0BA4 units by means
of LOGO!Soft Comfort.
204
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! program module (card)
6.1 Security function (CopyProtect)
We principally distinguish between program modules (card)
with and without circuit program/copy protection.
Unprotected program module (card)
You can edit circuit programs without restrictions, and exchange data between the program module (Card) and the
device.
Protected program module (card)
A circuit program is protected when it is transferred from a
protected program module (card) to the LOGO!.
To execute this circuit program in LOGO!, the protected
program module (card) must remain inserted during RUN,
i.e. the circuit program stored on the program module
(card) can not be copied to other LOGO! devices.
Over and above that, a protected circuit program is write–
protected.
A circuit program with password protection is no longer
protected after the correct password has been entered, i.e.
you can then edit the program and remove the module.
Note
You need to assign a password when you create the circuit
program for a protected module (card) to be able to edit it
at a later time (see Chapter 3.6.5).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
205
LOGO! program module (card)
Correlation between the password and the protective function
Password
Protection
Editing
Copying
Deleting
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes, with
password
Yes
Yes, with
password
–
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes, with
password
Yes, with
password
Yes, with
password
Assigning a security function
To assign a circuit program and copy protection function to
the program module (card), open the programming mode
and select “Card”.
1. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode (ESC / >Stop).
2. The main menu opens. To select the ’Card’ command:
Press or
3. To apply you entry in ’Card’:
Press OK
4. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’CopyProtect’: Press or
5. To apply ’CopyProtect’:
Press OK
LOGO! shows the following display:
>No
Yes
CopyProtect:
No
The current protection setting is shown in the bottom line.
This function is disabled by default (”No“: disabled).
206
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! program module (card)
Enabling the security function
To set the security function:
1. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’Yes’:
2. Confirm ’Yes’:
LOGO! shows the following display:
Press or
Press OK
>No
Yes
CopyProtect:
Yes
Note
This only generates a circuit program and copy protection
for the program module (card); the circuit program itself
must be copied separately from the LOGO! to the program
module (card) (can also be done initially).
You can always change the “No” status (security function
disabled) to “Yes” (security function enabled).
A status change from “Yes” (security function enabled) to
“No” (security function disabled) is only possible if the program module (card) does not contain a circuit program.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
207
LOGO! program module (card)
6.2 Inserting and removing the program
module (card)
When you remove a program module (card) with circuit
program and copy protection attribute, note the following:
The circuit program stored on the program module (card)
can only be executed if the card remains inserted during
system runtime.
After you have removed the program module (card),
LOGO! outputs the message’No Program’. A removal of
the program module (card) during RUN will lead to impermissible operating states.
Always heed the following warning:
!
Warning
Do not touch the open slot of the program module (card)
neither with your fingers, nor with a metallic or conductive
object.
The program module (card) socket may be under voltage if
the polarity is reversed at L1 and N by accident.
The program module (card) may only be removed by qualified personnel.
208
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! program module (card)
Removing the program module (card)
To remove the program module (card):
Carefully insert a screwdriver into the groove on the upper
end of the program module (card) and lever the module
partially out of the slot.
You can now remove the program module (card).
Inserting a program module (card)
The entry of the program module (card) slot is chamfered
on its bottom right. The edge of the program module (card)
is chamfered accordingly. This encoding prevents you from
inserting the program module (card) the wrong way round.
Insert the program module (card) into the slot and push it in
until it engages.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
209
LOGO! program module (card)
6.3 Copying data from the LOGO! to the program module (card)
To copy the circuit program to the program module (card):
1. Insert the program module (card) into the slot.
2. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode (ESC / >Stop).
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
LOGO! main menu
3. The main menu opens. To select the ’Card’ command:
Press or
4. Press OK. The transfer menu opens.
> Card
Card
CopyProtect
= LOGO!
5. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’LOGO Card’ (if required)
Press or
6. Press OK.
LOGO! now copies the circuit program to the program module (card).
When LOGO! has finished copying, it automatically returns
you to the main menu:
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
The circuit program backup is now stored on your program
module (card) and you can remove the card. Do not forget
to replace the cap.
210
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! program module (card)
If power fails while LOGO! is copying the circuit program,
repeat the process after Power On.
Note
The password X of a protected circuit program in LOGO!
also applies to the copied program version on your program module (card).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
211
LOGO! program module (card)
6.4 Copying data from the program module
(card) to LOGO!
You have a program module (card) that contains your circuit program. There are two ways to copy it to LOGO!:
Automatically during the startup of LOGO!
(POWER ON) or
by means of the “Card” menu of LOGO!.
Note
If the program on the module/card is protected with the
password X, the copied program in the LOGO! is also protected with the same password.
Automatic copying during the startup of LOGO!
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the power supply to the LOGO!
(POWER OFF)
2. Remove the slot cover.
3. Insert the program module/card into the relevant slot.
4. Switch on the power supply to the LOGO!
LOGO! copies the program from the program module/card
to LOGO!. When LOGO! has finished copying, it opens the
main menu:
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
212
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! program module (card)
Note
Before you switch the LOGO! to RUN, you must ensure
that the system you are controlling with LOGO! does not
represent a source of hazard.
1. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’Start’:
2. Press OK.
Press
or
Copying by means of the “Card”menu
For information on the replacement of a program module
(card), also note Chapter 6.2.
To copy a program from the program module (card) to
LOGO!:
1. Insert the program module (card)
2. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode (ESC / >Stop).
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
3. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’Card’: Press or
4. Press OK. The transfer menu opens.
5. Move the ’>’ cursor to ’Card LOGO’:
Press or
Card
>Card
CopyProtect
= LOGO!
6. Press OK.
LOGO! copies the circuit program from the program module (card) to LOGO!. When LOGO! has finished copying, it
automatically returns to the main menu.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
213
LOGO! program module (card)
214
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
7 LOGO! Software
LOGO!Soft Comfort is available as a programming package for the PC. This software provides many features, for
example:
A graphic interface for offline creation of your circuit program by means of Ladder Diagram (contact chart / circuit diagram) or Function Block Diagram (function chart)
Simulation of your circuit program on the PC
Generating and printing of an overview chart for the circuit program
Saving a backup of the circuit program on the hard drive
or other media
Comparing circuit programs
Easy configuration of blocks
Transferring the circuit program
– from the LOGO! to the PC and
– from the PC to LOGO!
Reading the values of the hour counter
Setting the TOD
Summertime/wintertime conversion
Online test: Display of status changes and process variables of LOGO! in RUN mode:
– Status of a digital I/O, flags, shift register bits and
cursor keys
– The values of all analog I/Os and flags
– The results of all blocks
– The current values (including the times) of selected
blocks
Stopping circuit program execution via the PC (STOP).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
215
LOGO! Software
The LOGO! alternative
As you can see, LOGO!Soft Comfort represents an alternative to conventional engineering methods:
1. You start by developing the circuit program on your
desktop.
2. You simulate the circuit program on your computer and
verify its functions, before you actually implement it in
your system.
3. You can add comments to the circuit program and
create hardcopies.
4. You save a copy of your circuit program to the file system on your PC, to make it directly available for any
modifications.
5. It takes only a few key actions to download the circuit
program to LOGO!.
LOGO!Soft Comfort
LOGO!Soft Comfort allows you the efficient, easy and concise creation of your circuit programs on the PC (”Wiring by
means of Softkey“). After you have created the circuit program, you can either let the system decide which LOGO!
version it requires for your program, or predetermine the
relevant LOGO! version for the circuit program.
Particularly user-friendly functions are;
Offline program simulation
Simultaneous display of the status of several special
functions
Extensive options of circuit program documentation
Display of the states and process variables of LOGO! in
RUN mode
a comprehensive Online Help.
216
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! Software
LOGO!Soft Comfort runs under Windows 95/98,
Windows NT 4.0, Windows Me, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Linuxand Mac OS X. LOGO!Soft Comfort is capable of client/server operation and offers you a
high degree of freedom and comfort for creating your circuit
program.
LOGO!Soft Comfort V4.0
This is the current version of LOGO!Soft Comfort. You will
find all the functions and the functionality of the devices
described in this manual in the version 4.0 and later.
Updating LOGO!Soft Comfort versions V1.0 up to V3.0
The update can only be installed for the full version of
LOGO!Soft Comfort V1.0, V2.0 or V3.0.
order numbers are found in Appendix E.
Updates and info
You can download demo versions of the software free of
charge from the Internet address specified in the preface.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
217
LOGO! Software
7.1 Connecting the LOGO! to a PC
Connecting the PC cable
To connect the LOGO! to a PC, you need the LOGO! PC
cable (order number is found in Appendix E).
Remove the cap or program module (card) from your
LOGO! and connect the cable to this socket. Connect the
other end of the cable to the serial port of your PC.
Connecting the PC cable to the USB port
If your PC is only equipped with a USB interface (Universal
Serial Bus), you will need a converter and a device driver to
connect the LOGO! cable to this port. Follow the instructions on the screen when you install the driver for the converter.Make sure you specify the correct Windows OS version when you select the driver.
Switching LOGO! to PCLOGO mode
1. Switch the LOGO! with/without display to STOP from
your PC (refer to the LOGO!Soft Comfort Online Help),
or select the ESC / >Stop command on a device with
display and confirm the entry with ’Yes’.
When LOGO! is in STOP and online with the PC, the following PC commands are accepted:
Switch LOGO! to RUN
Read/write the circuit program
Read/write the summertime/wintertime
2. When you start the upload/download in STOP, the following display appears automatically:
PC
218
= LOGO!
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! Software
Note
Earlier versions up to 0BA3 with/without display are automatically switched to PCLOGO mode as follows:
1. Switch off the power supply to the LOGO!.
2. Remove the cover or the program module (card) and
connect the cable to this socket.
3. Switch on power.
LOGO! switches automatically to PC LOGO mode.
The PC can now access the LOGO! For information on
this function, refer to the LOGO!Soft Comfort Online Help.
For more information on LOGO! versions without display,
refer to Appendix C.
Closing the PCLOGO mode
When the data transfer is completed, the connection to the
PC is shut down automatically.
Note
If the circuit program created with LOGO!Soft Comfort is
password protected, both the circuit program and the
password are downloaded to LOGO!. The password
prompt is enabled at the end of the data transfer.
The upload of a password protected program created in
LOGO! is only possible after the correct password is entered in LOGO!Soft Comfort.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
219
LOGO! Software
220
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
8 Applications
We have provided a small collection of applications in this
manual to give you an impression of the versatility of
LOGO!. For these examples we have recorded once again
the original solution of the circuit diagram, and compared it
with the LOGO! solutions.
You can find solutions for the following tasks:
Page
Stairway or corridor lighting system
223
Automatic door
227
Ventilation system
234
Factory gate
239
Central controlling and monitoring of several
factory gates
243
Luminous rows
247
Service water pump
251
Further applications
255
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
221
Applications
Note
LOGO! applications are available to all our customers free
of charge. The examples provided are noncommittal, serve
as general information about the fields of application for
LOGO!, and may be different to user-specific solutions.
The user operates the system at his own responsibility. We
refer to the relevant national standards and system-related
installation regulations.
Although you have four inputs available for logic operations (basic functions, see Chapter 4.2), the following figures will only show a maximum of three inputs for reasons
of clarity. You program this fourth input and assign parameters just like the other three inputs.
Errors can not be ruled out, and the right to make changes
is reserved.
These application and tips for further applications are also
found on the Internet under the URL specified earlier in the
preface.
222
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
8.1 Stairway or corridor lighting
8.1.1 Requirements for a stairway lighting system
The basic requirements for a stairway lighting system are
as follows:
When someone is using the stairway, the lighting should
be switched on.
If no-one is in the stairway, the lights should be switched
off in order to save energy.
8.1.2 Previous solution
The two conventional options for switching the lights:
With a pulse relay
With an automatic stairway lighting switch
The wiring of both these lighting systems is identical.
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Lights
Distribution box
Distribution with
pulse relay
or
Pushbuttons
automatic
stairway
lighting switch
Components used
Momentary switches
Automatic stairway lighting switch or pulse relay
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
223
Applications
Lighting system with pulse relay
Function of a lighting system with pulse relay:
Press any pushbutton: The lighting is switched on
Press any of the pushbuttons once again: The lighting is
switched off.
Disadvantage: People often forget to switch off the lights.
Lighting system with an automatic stairway lighting switch
Function of a lighting system with automatic stairway lighting switch:
Press any pushbutton: The lighting is switched on
The lights are switched off automatically when the preset time has expired.
Disadvantage: The lights can not be switched on for a longer period of time (e.g. when cleaning the stairway). The
switch for permanent lighting is usually located on the automatic stairway lighting switch and may be difficult or impossible to access.
8.1.3 Lighting system with LOGO!
A LOGO! system allows you to replace the automatic
stairway lighting switch or the pulse relay. You can also implement both functions (timed off-delay and pulse relay) in
a single unit. What is more, you can incorporate extra functions without making any alterations to the wiring. Here are
some examples:
Pulse relay with LOGO!
Automatic stairway lighting switch with LOGO!
Multiple function switch with LOGO!
– Switch light on
– Switch on permanent lighting
– Switch light off
224
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
Wiring of a lighting system with LOGO! 230RC
ÏÏ ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏ
Lamps
N
L
PE
L1 N I1 I2 I3 I4
I1
I5
I3 I6 I7 I8
Switches
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
The external wiring of a lighting system with a LOGO! is no
different than it is for a conventional stairway and corridor
lighting system. Only the automatic stairway lighting switch/
pulse relay is replaced. Supplementary functions are entered directly in LOGO!.
Pulse relay with LOGO!
Switch:I1
x
Q1
Lamps
Output Q1 is toggled with a pulse signal at input I1.
Automatic stairway lighting switch with LOGO!
Momentary I1
switch:
T
06:00m
Q1
Lights
Output Q1 is set for the duration of 6 minutes with a pulse
signal at input I1.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
225
Applications
Multiple function switch with LOGO!
Switch: I1
TH / TL
Q1
Lights
Output Q1 is set for the duration of a preset time TH with a
pulse signal at input I1.
The permanent lighting function is enabled by keeping the
momentary switch pressed for a specified time TL.
8.1.4 Special features and expansion options
Other options for increasing comfort or saving energy are,
for example:
A flashing function that indicates that the light is about to
be switched off automatically.
You can integrate various central functions:
– Central off
– Central on (panic button)
– Control of all lamps or individual circuits by means of
a daylight control switch
– Controlling by means of an integrated timer
(e.g. permanent lighting only until 24.00 h; disabled
at specific times)
– Automatically switching off the permanent lighting on
expiration of a preset time (e.g. after 3 hours)
226
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
8.2 Automatic door
You often find automatic door control systems at the entrance to supermarkets, public buildings, banks, hospitals
etc.
8.2.1 Requirements of an automatic door
When a person approaches the door, it must open automatically.
The door must remain open until the doorway is cleared.
When the doorway is cleared, the door must close automatically with a short delay.
Outside
Motion detector
B1
ÑÑÑÑÑÌÌÌÌÌ
S1
Inside
Limit switch S2
closed
B2
Motion detector
Limit switch
open
Q1 Master switch
Motion detector
ÑÑÑÑÌÌÌÌ
ÑÑÑÑÌÌÌÌ
ÑÑÑÑÌÌÌÌ
ÑÑÑÑÌÌÌÌ
ÑÑÑÑÌÌÌÌ
ÑÑÑÑÌÌÌÌ
ÑÑÑÑÌÌÌÌ
ÑÑÑÑÌÌÌÌ
Master switch
The door is usually driven by a motor that is equipped with
a slip coupling. This prevents people from being squeezed
in and injured. The control system is connected to the
mains via a master switch.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
227
Applications
8.2.2 Conventional solution
Auxiliary circuit
L1
S2
K3
S2
K3
B1
B2
S1
K2
K1
N
Open
K3
K4
Close
B1
B2
K1
K2
K3
K3
K4
Open door
Waiting time
When someone enters the detection range of one of the
motion sensors B1 or B2, the door opening motion is initiated by setting K3.
After the detection range of the two motion sensors has
been cleared at least for a minimum time, K4 enables the
closing motion.
8.2.3 Door control system with LOGO!
LOGO! can simplify this circuit considerably. You only need
to connect the motion sensors, limit switches and the contactor relays to the LOGO! .
228
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
Wiring of a door control system with LOGO! 230RC
L1
S1
B1
L1 N
1
Q1
2
K1
I1 I2 I3 I4
1
S2
B2
Q2
2
I5 I6 I7
1
Q3
2
1
I8
Q4
2
K2
N
Open
Close
Components used
K1
K2
S1 (break contact)
S2 (break contact)
B1 (make contact)
B2 (make contact)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
contactor relay open
contactor relay Close
limit switch Closed
limit switch Open
infrared motion sensor outside
infrared motion sensor inside
229
Applications
Door control system with LOGO!circuit diagram
1
I1
I2
x
RS
Open
1
I4
x
Q1
I4
&
1
&
Q2
T=
4s
&
Q2
I3
1
Close
Q1
This is what the circuit diagram of the conventional solution
looks like.
You can simplify this circuit if you make use of the LOGO!
functions. You can use the off-delay function to replace the
latching relay and the on-delay. The block diagram below
illustrates this simplification:
Motion
detector
1
I1
I2
x
&
Q2
Q1
Open
x
10 s
Limit switch
I4
Door open
1
&
Limit switch
Door closed
Q2
I3
Close
1
Q1
230
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
8.2.4 Special features and expansion options
Options for increasing comfort and user friendliness are, for
example:
You can connect an additional control switch with the
positions: Open – Automatic – Closed (O-A-C)
You can connect a buzzer to an output of the LOGO! to
warn of the closing of the door.
You can enable opening of the door time and directiondependent, i.e. opening only during business hours, and
opening only from the inside after closing time.
8.2.5 Extended solution with LOGO! 230RC
Wiring the LOGO! extended solution
L1
B1
B2
L1 N
1
Q1
S1
S2
I1 I2 I3 I4
2
K1
1
Q2
K2
2
S3
I5 I6 I7
1
Q3
2
1
O-A-C
I8
Q4
2
H1
N
Open
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Close
Buzzer
231
Applications
Block diagram of the extended LOGO! solution
Cam1:
Day= Mo..Fr
On = 09:00
Off =18:00
Cam2:
Day= Sa
On = 08:00
Off =13:00
Detecting motion
x
x
I1
Motion detector B1
x
T= 10 s
Cam1:
Day= Mo..Fr
On = 09:00
Off =19:00
Cam2:
Day= Sa
On = 08:00
Off =14:00
x
I2
Motion detector B2
Actuate motor for opening
Close output
Q2
Q1
Open
x
Limit switch
Door open
Control switch
Door open
I4
I5
Actuate motor for closing
Limit switch
Door closed
I3
Open output
Motion detector B1
Motion detector B2
Q1
I1
I2
Control switch
Close door
232
x
Q2
Close
I6
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
Detecting motion
During business hours, the motion detector B1 initiates the
opening of the door when somebody wants to enter the
shop. Motion detector B2 initiates the opening of the door
when somebody wants to leave the shop.
After closing time, the motion detector B2 continues to be
used to open the door for 1 hour to allow the customers to
leave the shop.
Actuating the motor for opening
Output Q1 is set and opens the door when:
The control switch at I5 is actuated (the door is permanently open), or
The motion detectors indicate that somebody is approaching the door, and
The door has not yet fully opened (limit switch at I4).
Actuating the motor for closing
Output Q2 is set to close the door when:
The control switch at I6 is actuated (the door is permanently closed) or
The motion detectors indicate that there is nobody near
the door, and
The door has not yet fully closed (limit switch at I3).
Buzzer
Connect the buzzer to output Q3. The buzzer gives a brief
warning (in this case 1 second) when the door is closing.
Enter the following circuit at Q3 in the circuit program:
Q2
Close output
x
Q3
Buzzer
T= 1 s
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
233
Applications
8.3 Air-conditioning System
8.3.1 Requirements for an air-conditioning System
The air-conditioning system supplies fresh air to a room or
exhausts the contaminated air from a room. Let us examine
following example:
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Fresh-air fan
Flow sensor
Flow sensor
Exhaust fan
The room is equipped with an exhaust fan and a fresh
234
air fan.
Both fans are monitored by means of a flow sensor.
An excess atmospheric pressure may never develop in
the room.
The fresh-air fan must only be switched on if safe functioning of the exhaust fan is signaled by the flow sensor.
A warning lamp indicates failure of a fan.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
The circuit diagram for conventional solutions is as follows:
Auxiliary circuit
L1
S0
S1
K1
K2
K5
K4
K5
S2
S2 v>
K1
N
S3 v>
K2
K3
K4
Exhaust air
H1
K5
H2
Operation Error
Fresh air
The fans are monitored by means of flow sensors. If no air
flow is registered within a short waiting time, the system is
switched off and an error message is output. This message
can be acknowledged by pressing the OFF button.
In addition to the flow sensors, the fan monitoring system
also requires an evaluating circuit with several switching
devices. This evaluating circuit can be replaced by a single
LOGO! unit.
Wiring of an air-conditioning system with LOGO! 230RC
L1
S1
S0
S2 v>
L1 N I1 I2 I3 I1
I4
1
N
Q1
K1
2
1
K2
Exhaust
fan
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Q2
S3 v>
I3
I5 I6 I7 I8
2 1
Q3
H1
2 1
Q4
2
H2
Fresh-air
fan
235
Applications
Components used
K1
K2
S0 (break contact)
S1 (make contact)
S2 (make contact)
S3 (make contact)
H1
H2
contactor relay
contactor relay
STOP pushbutton
START pushbutton
flow sensor
flow sensor
signal lamp
signal lamp
Block diagram of the LOGO! solution
The block diagram of the air-conditioning system with
LOGO! :
On
I1
Error
Q3
Q1
Exhaust
fan
x
Off
I2
Exhaust fan
Q1
x
Exhaust fan
Exhaust air
flow sensor
Q1
Exhaust air flow
sensor
x
I3
Fresh-air fan
I3
Q2
Fresh-air
fan
x
T=
10 s
Q2
x
x
Fresh-air flow
sensor
I4
x
T= 10 s
Off
236
I2
Q3
Error
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
8.3.2 Advantages of using LOGO!
The LOGO! solution requires less switchgear. That saves
you installation time and space in the control cabinet. You
might even be able to use a smaller switching cabinet.
Additional LOGO! options
The free output (Q4) can be used as isolated signal contact for reporting faults or power failure.
It is possible to switch off of the fans by means of a sequential circuit.
These functions can be implemented without additional
switchgear.
Block diagram of the extended LOGO! solution
The fans at Q1 and Q2 are switched on and off by means
of the following circuit:
On
I1
Fault
Q3
Q1
Exhaust
fan
I2
Off
T=
30 s
x
Exhaust air flow
sensor
I3
x
x
T=
10 s
Q1 exhaust fan
Exhaust air flow
sensor
I3
Q2
Fresh-air
fan
x
T=
10 s
x
Fresh-air fan Q2
x
Fresh-air flow
sensor
I4
T=
10 s
Off
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
I2
Q3
Error
237
Applications
You can also generate a message at output Q4:
Q3
Error
Q4
Message
The relay contacts of output Q4 are always closed when
the system is in operation. Relay Q4 does not drop off unless there is a power failure or a fault in the system. This
contact can be used for remote monitoring, for example.
238
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
8.4 Factory door
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
Safety pressure bar
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
Indicator
lamp
The entrance to a company’s premises is often closed with
a gate. The gate is only opened to let vehicles in and out.
The gate is controlled by the porter.
8.4.1 Requirements for a gate control system
The gate is opened and closed by means of pushbuttons in the gatehouse. The porter can monitor the operation of the gate at the same time.
The gate is normally fully opened or fully closed. The
gate motion can be interrupted at any time.
An indicator lamp is switched on five seconds before the
gate starts moving and when the gate is in motion.
A safety pressure bar prevents harm to persons and
objects from getting trapped or damaged when the gate
is closing.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
239
Applications
8.4.2 Previous solution
Various control systems are used to operate automatic
gates. The circuit diagram below shows one of these options.
Auxiliary circuit
L1
S0
S1
K1
S2
K3
K1
K3
S2
S1
S5 p>
K3
S5 p>
K1
S3
K2
S4
K1
N
K2
K4
K6
K3
K4
Open
K5
H1
Indicator lamp
Close
K5
K6
Open Close
Wiring of a gate control system with LOGO! 230RC
L1
S3
S4
p>
S5
S0
Stop
S1
OpenS2
Close
L1 N
1
Q1
I1
2
I2
1
I3 I4
Q2
2
I5
1
Q3
2
I6
I7
1
I8
Q4
2
S5 p>
N
K1
Open
240
K3
H1
Close
Indicator lamp
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
Components used
K1
K2
S0 (break contact)
S1 (make contact)
S2 (make contact)
S3 (break contact)
S4 (break contact)
S5 (break contact)
contactor relay
contactor relay
STOP pushbutton
OPEN pushbutton
CLOSE pushbutton
Position sensor OPEN
Position sensor CLOSED
Safety bar
Block diagram of the LOGO! solution
Q2
Start
pushbutton
OPEN
Start pushbutton I2
CLOSED
I1
T=
5s
STOP
I3
pushbutton
Gate is open I4
x
Q1
Open
x
CLOSE pushbutton
TH=
TL=2 s
Inv=lo
Q1
Q3
Signal
lamp
x
STOP pushbutton
CLOSE
pushbutton
I2
OPEN pushbutton
I1
Safety bar
I3
I6
Gate is closed
I5
T=
5s
Q2
Close
x
The OPEN or CLOSE pushbuttons initiate the gate motion,
provided it is not already moving in the other direction. The
gate is stopped by means of the STOP pushbutton or the
relevant limit switch. A safety bar furthermore interrupts the
closing motion of the gate.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
241
Applications
8.4.3 Extended LOGO! solution
Our extended control circuit is to open the gate automatically when the safety bar is actuated.
Safety bar
I6
x
Q2
x
x
STOP pushbutton I3
Gate is open I4
Q1
Open
T=
5s
Q2
x
OPEN pushbutton I1
Q1
x
CLOSE pushbutton
I2
STOP pushbutton
I3
Safety bar
I6
Gate is closed
I5
242
TH=
TL=2 s
Inv=lo
T=
5s
Q3
Signal
lamp
Q2
Close
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
8.5 Centralized control and monitoring of
several factory doors
1
1
1
1 Safety bar
2 flashing warning light
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
ÔÔ
2
Door I
AS
interf.
2
AS
Door II
interf.
Master
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
Ô
2
Door III
AS
interf.
Often, a company’s premises can be entered at several
locations. Not all of the gates can always be monitored locally by personnel. They must therefore be able to be monitored and operated by the porter who sits in a central gatehouse.
It must also be possible for a member of staff to open and
close the gate locally.
For each gate we are going to use one LOGO! 230RC and
one communication module AS interface. The modules and
the master are interconnected by means of a bus system.
This chapter describes a gate control system. The structures of the other gate control systems are identical.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
243
Applications
8.5.1 Requirements for a gate control system
Every gate is opened and closed by means of a cord
operated switch. The gate is will be fully opened or fully
closed.
All gate can be opened and closed locally by means of
pushbuttons.
The gate can be opened and closed at the gatehouse
by means of the bus system. The GATE OPEN or GATE
CLOSED status is indicated.
An indicator lamp is switched on five seconds before the
gate starts moving and when the gate is in motion.
A safety pressure bar prevents harm to persons and
objects from getting trapped or damaged when the gate
closes.
Wiring of the gate control system with LOGO! 230RC and
CM AS interface
L1
p>
S0
L1
N
S1
I1
S2 S3
I2
I3
S4
I4
S5
I5
S6
I6
I7
I8
AS interface
1
2
1
Q1
2
Q2
1
2
1
Q3
2
Q4
p>
S6
K1
K2
N
Gate
244
Gate
Indicator lamp
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
Components used
K1
K2
S0 (make contact)
S1 (make contact)
S2 (make contact)
S3 (make contact)
S4 (break contact)
S5 (break contact)
contactor relay open
contactor relay Close
cord operated switch OPEN
cord operated switch CLOSE
OPEN pushbutton
CLOSE pushbutton
position sensor GATE IS OPEN
position sensor
GATE IS CLOSED
S6 (break contact) Safety bar
Master control system
Q5
Q6
I9
I10
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
position sensor GATE IS OPEN
position sensor GATE IS CLOSED
external pushbutton OPEN GATE
external pushbutton CLOSE GATE
245
Applications
Block diagram of the LOGO! solution
I5
I1
I9
Gate is open
&
1
Open gate
Open gate
1
x
Q1
x
x
I5
Gate is open
I3
I5
Open gate by hand
Gate is open
T=
5s
Open
gate
&
x
I4
I6
I7
I6
1
&
=1
Q2
T=
5s
Gate is closed
Gate is closed
Safety bar
Gate is open
Close
gate
&
x
I5
x
x
I2 Close 1
Closed
I10
x
I7
Safety bar
I6
I7
&
Close gate by hand
Gate is closed
Safety bar
1
&
Q3
x
TH=
TL=2 s
Inv=lo
Indicator
lamp
Q5
Open
Close
I6
Gate is closed
Q6
The OPEN GATE and CLOSE GATE pushbuttons initiate
the gate motion, provided it is not already moving in the
other direction. The gate motion ends at the respective limit
switch. Closing of the gate is also interrupted by the safety
bar.
246
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
8.6 Luminous rows
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Luminous rows 1
Luminous rows 2
Luminous rows 3
Luminous rows 4
Office
Corridor
When planning lighting systems for commercial locations,
the type and number of lamps used is determined by the
luminance required. For reasons of cost efficiency, the
installation often consists of fluorescent tubes arranged in
luminous rows, and are divided into separate switching circuits, according to the way the room is used.
8.6.1 Requirements for a lighting system
The various luminous rows are switched on and off locally.
If there is sufficient daylight, the rows on the window
side of the room are automatically switched off by
means of a daylight control switch.
The lights are switched off automatically at 20.00 h.
Local manual operation of the lighting must be possible
at all times.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
247
Applications
8.6.2 Previous solution
L1
lx>
B1
E1
K1
K1
K2
S1
S2
K3
K4
K2
S3
S4
K3
K4
K5
K6
K5
K6
E2
E3
E4
E5
E1
K2
N
The lamps are switched on and off with pulse relays, by
means of pushbutton control at the door. Regardless of
this, they are reset with a timer or daylight control switch
signal at the central off input. The pulse width of the off
commands must be reduced by means of wiping relays to
allow operation of the lights after they are switched off.
Components required:
Pushbuttons S1 to S4
Daylight control switch B1
Timer E1
Wiping relays K1 and K2
Pulse switches K3 to K6 with central OFF function
Disadvantages of the previous solution
A substantial amount of switchgear needs to be installed
to implement the necessary functions.
Due to the large number of mechanical components,
high wear and tear and maintenance expenditure is to
be expected.
The modification of functions involves considerable effort.
248
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
8.6.3 Luminous row control system with
LOGO! 230RC
L1
S1
S2
S3
lx<
S4
B1
L1 N I1
1
Q1
2
I2
I2
1
I3
Q2
I1
I4
2
I3
I3
I5
1
Q3
I6
2
I4
I7
1
I8
Q4
2
I5
N
Luminous
row 1
Luminous
row 2
Luminous
row 3
Luminous
row 4
Components used
S1 to S4 (make contact) momentary pushbutton
B1 (make contact)
daylight control switch
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
249
Applications
Block diagram of the LOGO! solution
Off pulse triggered with timer
Mo..Su
20:00 - 20.01
Mo..Su
21:00 - 21.01
T=
1s
I3
Luminous
row 3
Corridor side
Q3
I4
Luminous
row 4
Corridor side
Q4
I1
Luminous
row 1
Window side
Q1
I2
Luminous
row 2
Window side
Q2
x
Off pulse triggered with daylight control switch
Daylight control switch I5
T=
1s
x
I5
x
x
Advantages of the LOGO! solution
You can connect the lamps directly to the LOGO!, provided the power consumption does not exceed the
switching capacity of the various outputs. Higher loads
should be switched with a contactor relay.
Connect the daylight control switch directly to an input of
the LOGO! .
You do not need an external timer, because this function
is integrated in the LOGO! .
Due to the reduced amount of switchgear, you can
install a smaller and space-saving distribution cabinet.
Fewer devices are required
The lighting system can be easily modified.
Additional switching times can be set as required (sequential circuit for the off pulses at the end of the day).
The function of the daylight control switch can be easily
applied to all lamps or to a modified group of lamps.
250
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
8.7 Service water pump
The use of rainwater as an addition to the drinking water
supply is gaining importance in the domestic housing area.
This saves money and helps to protect the environment.
For example, rainwater can be used for:
Washing clothes
Irrigation system for gardens
Watering indoor plants
Car wash
Toilet flushing installations
The sketch below illustrates how such a rainwater utilization system is operated:
Rainwater
supply line
K4
Drinking water supply line
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÕÕÕ
ÎÎÎ
ÕÕÕ
ŠŠŠ
ÕÕÕ
ŠŠŠ
Pressure switch
S1
Control in the
distribution box
Pump
M1
Rainwater
reservoir
S2
S3
S4
Pressure tank
Service water
connection
Drinking water supply Off
Drinking water supply On
Dry-run protection Off
Dry-run protection On
The rainwater is collected in a reservoir. From the reservoir,
a pumping station supplies a respective line system. From
there it can be tapped in the same way as normal drinking
water. If the reservoir should run dry it can be topped up
with drinking water.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
251
Applications
8.7.1 Requirements for a control system of a service
water pump
Service water must be available at all times. In case of
emergency, the control system must automatically
switch over to drinking water supply.
When switching over to the drinking water supply, the
ingress of rainwater into the drinking water system must
be prevented.
The service water pump may not be switched on if the
reservoir has run low of rainwater (dry-run protection).
8.7.2 Previous solution
Auxiliary circuit
L1
K3
S3
S1 p<
K2
K1
N
Pump
K2
S4
S2
K3
K3
Tracking time Dry-run
protection
S3
K4
K4
Y1
Drinking water
supply line
The pump and a solenoid valve are controlled by means of
a pressure switch and 3 float switches, which are installed
in the rainwater reservoir. The pump must be switched on
when the pressure level in the boiler drops below minimum.
After the operating pressure is reached, the pump is
switched off again after a tracking time of a few seconds
has expired. The tracking time prevents oscillation of the
water pump if water is drawn off over a longer period of
time.
252
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
8.7.3 Service water pump system with
LOGO! 230RC
L1
S1
p<
L1 N
S3
S2
I1
I2
I3
1 Q1 2
1 Q2 2
K1
Y1
I4
S4
I5
1 Q3 2
I6
I7
I8
1 Q4 2
N
Pump
Drinking water supply line
Apart from the LOGO!, all you need is a pressure switch
and the float switches to control the pump. If you are using
a 3-phase AC motor, you must use a contactor relay to
switch the pump. For single-phase AC pump systems you
must provide a contactor relay if the power consumption of
the AC motor exceeds the capacity of the output relay Q1.
The power consumption of a solenoid valve is usually low
enough to allow direct controlling.
K1
contactor relay
Y1
solenoid valve
S1 (make contact)
pressure switch
S2 (make contact)
float switch
S3 (break contact)
float switch
S4 (break contact)
float switch
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
253
Applications
Block diagram of the LOGO! solution
Pressure
switch
I1
x
T = 20 s
Float switch for dryrun protection OFF
x
Pump
Q1
I3
Float switch for dryI4
run protection ON
Float switch for drinking water supply ON
Drinking water
supply line
Q2
I3
Float switch for drinking water supply OFF
I2
8.7.4 Special features and expansions
The block diagram shows how you can interconnect the
pump controls and the solenoid valve. The layout corresponds with the circuit diagram. You also have the option to
integrate further functions for specific applications, which
can only be implemented in a conventional circuitry by adding further switchgear, e.g.:
Enabling the pump at specific times
Indication of imminent or existing water shortage
Reporting of system faults
254
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
8.8
Further fields of application
In addition to the application samples shown above, we
have placed further sample applications on the Internet
(see the preface for the URL).
There you can find, for example:
Irrigation system for greenhouse plants
Conveyor control system
Bending machine control system
Shop window lighting
Bell system (e.g. in a school)
Parking lot surveillance
Outdoor lighting
Shutter control system
Domestic outdoor and indoor lighting system
Control system of a cream stirrer
Sports hall lighting
Constant load on 3 consumers
Sequential control system for cable-welding machines
for large cross-sections
Step switch (e.g. for fans)
Sequential control for boilers
Control system for several pump sets with centralized
operator control
Cutting device (e.g. for detonating fuses)
Monitoring periods of utilization, e.g. of a solar energy
system
Intelligent foot switches, e.g. for speed preselection)
Elevating platform controls
Impregnation of textiles, heating and conveyor belt controls
Silo-filling system
and lots more.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
255
Applications
On the Web you can also find descriptions and the corresponding circuit diagrams of the applications. You can read
these *.pdf files with the Adobe AcrobatReader. If you have
installed LOGO!Soft Comfort on your computer, you can
simply click the disk icon to download the relevant circuit
programs, which you can then adapt to suit your application
and download to the LOGO! directly via the PC cable.
Benefits of LOGO!
LOGO! is a particularly useful feature
For replacing auxiliary switchgear with the integrated
LOGO! functions
For saving wiring and installation work - because
LOGO! keeps the wiring ”in its head”.
For reducing space requirements for components in the
control cabinet/distribution box. A smaller control cabinet/distribution box may provide sufficient space.
For adding or changing functions, without having to
install additional switchgear or change the wiring.
For offering your customers new, additional functions for
domestic and commercial housing installations. Examples:
– Domestic security systems: LOGO! switches on a
lamp at regular intervals or opens and closes the
shutters while you are on holiday.
– Central heating: LOGO! runs the circulation pump
only when water or heating is actually required.
– Refrigerating systems: LOGO! can defrost refrigerating systems at regular intervals to save energy costs.
– You can illuminate aquaria and terraria on a time-dependent basis.
Last not least you can:
Use commonly available switches and pushbuttons,
which makes it easy to install a domestic system.
Connect LOGO! directly to your domestic installation;
the integrated power supply makes it possible.
256
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Applications
Do you want more Info?
For more information about LOGO!, see our web page
(see the preface for the URL).
Do you have any suggestions?
There are definitely many more useful applications for the
LOGO! . If you know of one, why not write to us? We will
collect all the suggestions made and distribute as many of
them as we can. No matter whether your LOGO! circuit is
particularly complex or simple, simply write to us. We shall
be delighted to receive all your suggestions.
Write to:
Siemens AG
A&D AS SM MA
PO box 48 48
D-90327 Nuremberg
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
257
Applications
258
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
A Technical data
A.1 General technical data
Criterion
Tested in accordance with
LOGO!Basic:
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
Values
72 x 90 x 55 mm
Approx. 190 g
Installation
on a 35 mm profile rail
4 module widths
or wall mounting
LOGO! expansion
module:
Dimensions (WxHxD)
36 x 90 x 55 mm
Weight
Approx. 90 g
Installation
on a 35 mm profile rail
4 module widths
or wall mounting
Climatic conditions
Ambient temperature
Horizontal installation
Vertical installation
Low temperature to
IEC 60068-2-1
High temperature
to
IEC 60068-2-2
–- 40 °C ... +70 °C
Storage/shipping
Relative humidity
IEC 60068-2-30
From 10 to 95 %
no condensation
795 ... 1080 hPa
IEC 60068-2-42
IEC 60068-2-43
SO2 10 cm3 /m3,
4 days
H2S 1 cm3 /m3,
4 days
Air pressure
Pollutants
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
0 ... 55 °C
0 ... 55 °C
259
Technical data
Criterion
Tested in accordance with
Values
Ambient mechanical conditions
Protection mode
IP20
Vibrations:
IEC 60068-2-6
5 ... 9 Hz (constant
amplitude 3.5 mm)
9 ... 150 Hz (constant
acceleration 1 g)
Shock
IEC 60068-2-27
18 shocks
(half-sine wave
15g/11 ms)
Drop
IEC 60068-2-31
Drop height 50 mm
Free fall (packaged)
IEC 60068-2-32
1m
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Noise emission
EN 55011/A
EN 55022/B
EN 50081-1
(domestic area)
Limit class B group 1
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 61000-4-2
Severity 3
IEC 61000-4-3
8 kV air discharge
6 kV contact discharge
Field strength 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-6
10 V
IEC 61000-4-4
Severity 3
IEC 61000-4-5
Severity 3
2 kV (supply and signal lines)
1 kV (power lines)
symmetrical
2 kV (power lines)
asymmetrical
IEC 60664,
IEC 61131-2,
EN 50178
cULus to UL 508,
CSA C22.2 No.
142
With LOGO!
230 R/RC,
also VDE 0631
IEC 61131-2
Fulfilled
Electromagnetic fields
HF currents on cables and
cable shielding
Burst pulses
High-energy surge pulse
(applies only to
LOGO! 230 ...)
Safety to IEC / VDE
Clearance and creepage
distance rating
Insulation strength
260
Fulfilled
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Technical data
A.2 Technical data: LOGO! 230...
and LOGO! DM8 230R
LOGO! 230 RC
LOGO! 230 RCo
LOGO! DM8 230R
Input voltage
115...240 V AC/DC
115...240 V AC/DC
Permissible range
85 ... 265 V AC
100 ... 253 V DC
85 ... 265 V AC
100 ... 253 V DC
Permissible mains frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
47 ... 63 Hz
115 V AC
10 ...40 mA
10 ... 30 mA
240 V AC
10 ... 25 mA
10 ... 20 mA
115 V DC
5 ... 25 mA
5 ... 15 mA
240 V DC
5 ... 15 mA
5 ... 10 mA
Power supply
Power consumption
Voltage failure buffering
115 V AC/DC
240 V AC/DC
typ
typ.
y 10 ms
typ
typ.
y 10 ms
typ 20 ms
typ.
typ 20 ms
typ.
115 V AC
1.1 ... 4.6 W
1.1 ... 3.5 W
240 V AC
2.4 ... 6.0 W
2.4 ... 4.8 W
115 V DC
0.5 ... 2.9 W
0.5 ... 1.8 W
240 V DC
1.2 ... 3.6 W
1.2 ... 2.4 W
Power loss at
Backup of the real-time clock
at 25 C
typ. 80 h
Accuracy of the real-time
clock
typ. 2 s / day
Digital inputs
Number
8
4
Electrical isolation
No
No
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
261
Technical data
LOGO! 230 RC
LOGO! 230 RCo
LOGO! DM8 230R
Signal 0
< 40 V AC
< 40 V AC
Signal 1
> 79 V AC
> 79 V AC
Signal 0
< 30 V DC
< 30 V DC
Signal 1
> 79 V DC
> 79 V DC
< 0.03 mA
< 0.03 mA
0 08 mA
> 0.08
0 08 mA
> 0.08
0 to 1
1 to 0
typ.
y 50 ms
typ.
y 50 ms
typ. 50 ms
typ. 50 ms
Line length (unshielded)
100 m
100 m
Number
4
4
Output type
Relay outputs
Relay outputs
Electrical isolation
Yes
Yes
In groups of
1
1
Control of a digital input
Yes
Yes
Continuous current Ith
max. 10 A per relay
max. 5 A per relay
230/240 V AC
1000 W
1000 W
115/120 V AC
500 W
500 W
Fluorescent tubes with ballast
(25000 switching cycles)
10 x 58 W
(at 230/240 V AC)
10 x 58 W
(at 230/240 V AC)
Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated (25000
switching cycles)
1 x 58 W
(at 230/240 V AC)
1 x 58 W
(at 230/240 V AC)
Input voltage L1
Input current at
Signal 0
Signal 1
Delay time at
Digital outputs
Incandescent lamp load
(25000 switching cycles) at
262
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Technical data
LOGO! 230 RC
LOGO! 230 RCo
LOGO! DM8 230R
Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000 switching
cycles)
10 x 58 W (at
230/240 V AC)
10 x 58 W (at
230/240 V AC)
Short circuit-proof cos 1
Power protection
B16
600A
Power protection
B16
600A
Short-circuit proof cos
0.5 to 0.7
Power protection
B16
900A
Power protection
B16
900A
Derating
none; across the
entire temperature
range
none; across the
entire temperature
range
Parallel output circuits for
power increase
Not permitted
Not permitted
Protection of output relay
(if desired)
max. 16 A,
characteristic B16
max. 16 A,
characteristic B16
Mechanical
10 Hz
10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load
2 Hz
2 Hz
Inductive load
0.5 Hz
0.5 Hz
Switching rate
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
263
Technical data
A.3 Technical data: LOGO! 24... and
LOGO! DM8 24
LOGO! 24
LOGO! 24o
LOGO! DM8 24
Input voltage
24 V DC
24 V DC
Permissible range
20.4 ... 28.8 V DC
20.4 ... 28.8 V DC
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Yes
30 ... 55 mA
30 ... 45 mA
0.3 A per output
0.3 A per output
0.7 ... 1.3 W
0.8 ... 1.1 W
Number
8
4
Electrical isolation
No
No
Input voltage
L+
L+
Signal
g
0
Signal 1
< 5 V DC
< 5 V DC
> 8 V DC
> 8 V DC
Power supply
Permissible mains frequency
Power consumption from
24 V DC
Voltage failure buffering
Power loss at 24 V
Backup of the real-time clock
at 25 C
Accuracy of the real-time
clock
Digital inputs
264
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Technical data
LOGO! 24
LOGO! 24o
LOGO! DM8 24
Signal 0
< 1.0 mA (I1...I6)
< 0.05 mA (I7,
( , I8))
< 1.0 mA
Signal 1
> 1.5 mA (I1... I6)
> 0.1 mA (I7, I8)
> 1.5 mA
typ. 1.5 ms (I1...I4)
typ. 1.5 ms
Input current at
Delay time at
0 to 1
<1.0 ms (I5, I6)
typ.
y 300 ms ((I7,I8))
1 to 0
typ. 1.5 ms (I1...I4)
typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I5, I6)
typ. 300 ms (I7,I8)
Line length (unshielded)
100 m
100 m
Analog inputs
Number
2 (I7 and I8)
Range
0 ... 10 V DC
input impedance
76 k
max. input voltage
28.8 V DC
Line length (shielded and
twisted)
10 m
Digital outputs
Number
4
4
Output type
Transistor,
current-sourcing
Transistor,
current-sourcing
Electrical isolation
No
No
Control of a digital input
Yes
Yes
Output voltage
Supply voltage
Supply voltage
Output current
max. 0.3 A
max. 0.3 A
In groups of
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
265
Technical data
LOGO! 24
LOGO! 24o
LOGO! DM8 24
Short circuit-proof and overload-proof
Yes
Yes
Short-circuit current limitation
Approx. 1 A
Approx. 1 A
Derating
none; across the
entire temperature
range
none; across the
entire temperature
range
Not permitted
Not permitted
Electrical
10 Hz
10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load
10 Hz
10 Hz
Inductive load
0.5 Hz
0.5 Hz
Continuous current Ith
Incandescent lamp load
(25000 switching cycles) at
Fluorescent tubes with ballast
(25000 switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated (25000
switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000 switching
cycles)
Short circuit-proof cos 1
Short-circuit proof cos 0.5 to
0.7
Parallel output circuit for
power increase
Protection of output relay (if
desired)
Switching rate
Mechanical
266
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Technical data
A.4 Technical data: LOGO! 24RC... and
LOGO! DM8 24 R
LOGO! 24RC
LOGO! 24RCo
LOGO! DM8 24 R
Input voltage
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
Permissible range
20.4 ... 26.4 V AC
20.4 ... 28.8 V DC
20.4 ... 26.4 V AC
20.4 ... 28.8 V DC
47 ... 63 Hz
47 ... 63 Hz
24 V AC
24 V DC
40 ... 110 mA
40 ... 110 mA
20 ... 75 mA
20 ... 75 mA
Voltage failure buffering
typ. 5 ms
typ. 5 ms
24 V AC
24 V DC
0.9 ... 2.7 W
0.9 ... 2.7 W
0.4 ... 1.8 W
0.4 ... 1.8 W
Backup of the real-time clock
at 25 C
typ. 80 h
typ. 80 h
Accuracy of the real-time
clock
typ. 2 s / day
Power supply
Reverse polarity protection
Permissible mains frequency
Power consumption
Power loss
Digital inputs
Number
8,
optional P action or
N action
4,
optional P action or
N action
Electrical isolation
No
No
Input voltage
L
L
Signal
g
0
Signal 1
< 5 V AC/DC
< 5 V AC/DC
> 12 V AC/DC
> 12 V AC/DC
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
267
Technical data
LOGO! 24RC
LOGO! 24RCo
LOGO! DM8 24 R
< 1.0 mA
< 1.0 mA
> 2.5 mA
> 2.5 mA
0 to 1
typ. 1,5 ms
typ. 1.5 ms
1 to 0
typ. 15 ms
typ. 15 ms
Line length (unshielded)
100 m
100 m
Number
4
4
Output type
Relay outputs
Relay outputs
Electrical isolation
Yes
Yes
In groups of
1
1
Control of a digital input
Yes
Yes
Continuous current Ith
max. 10 A per relay
max. 5 A per relay
Incandescent lamp load
(25000 switching cycles) at
1000 W
1000 W
Fluorescent tubes with ballast
(25000 switching cycles)
10 x 58 W
10 x 58 W
Input current at
Signal 0
Signal 1
Delay time at
Analog inputs
Number
Range
max. Input voltage
Digital outputs
Output voltage
Output current
268
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Technical data
LOGO! 24RC
LOGO! 24RCo
LOGO! DM8 24 R
Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated (25000
switching cycles)
1 x 58 W
1 x 58 W
Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000 switching
cycles)
10 x 58 W
10 x 58 W
Derating
none; across the
entire temperature
range
none; across the
entire temperature
range
Short circuit-proof cos 1
Power protection
B16,
600A
Power protection
B16,
600A
Short-circuit proof cos 0.5 to
0.7
Power protection
B16,
900A
Power protection
B16,
900A
Parallel output circuits for
power increase
Not permitted
Not permitted
Protection of output relay (if
desired)
max. 16 A,
characteristic B16
max. 16 A,
characteristic B16
10 Hz
10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load
2 Hz
2 Hz
Inductive load
0.5 Hz
0.5 Hz
Short circuit-proof and overload-proof
Short-circuit current limitation
Switching rate
Mechanical
Electrical
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
269
Technical data
A.5 Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... and
LOGO! DM8 12/24R
LOGO! 12/24RC
LOGO! 12/24RCo
LOGO! DM8
12/24R
Input voltage
12/24 V DC
12/24 V DC
Permissible range
10.8 ... 28.8 V DC
10.8 ... 28.8 V DC
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Yes
30 ... 140 mA
30 ... 140 mA
20 ... 75 mA
20 ... 75 mA
typ. 2 ms
typ. 2 ms
typ. 5 ms
typ. 5 ms
12 V DC
24 V DC
0.3 ... 1.7 W
0.3 ... 1.7 W
0.4 ... 1.8 W
0.4 ... 1.8 W
Backup of the real-time clock
at 25 C
typ. 80 h
Accuracy of the real-time
clock
typ. 2 s / day
Electrical isolation
No
No
Number
8
4
Electrical isolation
No
No
< 5 V DC
< 5 V DC
> 8 V DC
> 8 V DC
Power supply
Power consumption
12 V DC
24 V DC
Voltage failure buffering
12 V DC
24 V DC
Power loss
Digital inputs
Input voltage L+
Signal
g
0
Signal 1
270
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Technical data
LOGO! 12/24RC
LOGO! 12/24RCo
LOGO! DM8
12/24R
Signal 0
< 1.0 mA (I1...I6)
< 0.05 mA (I7, I8)
< 1.0 mA
Signal
Si
l1
> 1.5
1 5 mA
A (I1...
(I1 I6)
> 0.1 mA (I7, I8)
> 1.5 mA
typ. 1.5 ms
typ. 1.5 ms
Input current at
Delay time at
0 to 1
<1.0 ms (I5, I6)
typ.
y 300 ms ((I7,I8))
1 to 0
typ. 1.5 ms
typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I5, I6)
typ. 300 ms (I7,I8)
Line length (unshielded)
100 m
100 m
Analog inputs
Number
2 (I7, I8)
Range
0 ... 10 V DC
input impedance
76 k
max. Input voltage
28.8 V DC
Line length (shielded and
twisted)
10 m
Digital outputs
Number
4
4
Output type
Relay outputs
Relay outputs
Electrical isolation
Yes
Yes
In groups of
1
1
Control of a digital input
Yes
Yes
Output voltage
Output current
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
271
Technical data
LOGO! 12/24RC
LOGO! 12/24RCo
LOGO! DM8
12/24R
max. 10 A per relay
max. 5 A per relay
Incandescent lamp load
(25000 switching cycles) at
1000 W
1000 W
Fluorescent tubes with ballast
(25000 switching cycles)
10 x 58 W
10 x 58 W
Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated (25000
switching cycles)
1 x 58 W
1 x 58 W
Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000 switching
cycles)
10 x 58 W
10 x 58 W
Derating
none; across the
entire temperature
range
none; across the
entire temperature
range
Short circuit-proof cos 1
Power protection
B16
600A
Power protection
B16
600A
Short-circuit proof cos 0.5 to
0.7
Power protection
B16
900A
Power protection
B16
900A
Parallel output circuits for
power increase
Not permitted
Not permitted
Protection of output relay (if
desired)
max. 16 A,
characteristic B16
max. 16 A,
characteristic B16
10 Hz
10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load
2 Hz
2 Hz
Inductive load
0.5 Hz
0.5 Hz
Continuous current Ith (per
terminal)
Short circuit-proof and overload-proof
Short-circuit current limitation
Switching rate
Mechanical
Electrical
272
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Technical data
A.6 Switching capacity and service life of the
relay outputs
Ohmic load
Switching cycles/million
0.4
12/24 V AC/DC
115/120 V AC
230/240 V AC
Maximum 10 A
Maximum 10 A
Maximum 10 A
0.3
120 V DC
240 V DC
Maximum 0.2 A
Maximum 0.1 A
0.5
0.2
0.1
2
4
6
8
10
Switched current/A
Figure A Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with ohmic
load (heating)
Inductive load
Switching cycles/million
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
1
12/24 V AC/DC
115/120 V AC
230/240 V AC
Maximum 2 A
Maximum 3 A
Maximum 3 A
120 V DC
240 V DC
Maximum 0.2 A
Maximum 0.1 A
2
3
Switched current/A
Figure B Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with high inductive load to IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/AC 15 (contactors, solenoid
coils, motors)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
273
Technical data
A.7 Technical data: LOGO! AM 2
LOGO! AM 2
Power supply
Input voltage
12/24 V DC
Permissible range
10.8 ... 28.8 V DC
Power consumption
25 ... 50 mA
Voltage failure buffering
typ. 5 ms
Power loss at
12 V
24 V
0.3 ... 0.6 W
Electrical isolation
No
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Ground terminal
for connecting ground and shielding of
the analog measuring line.
0.6 ... 1.2 W
Analog inputs
Number
2
Type
Unipolar
Input range
0 ... 10 V DC (input impedance 76 k)
or
0 ... 20 mA (input impedance <250 )
Resolution
10 bit, normalized to 0 ... 1000
Cycle time for analog value
generation
50 ms
Electrical isolation
No
Line length (shielded and
twisted)
10 m
Encoder supply voltage
none
Error limit
+/– 1.5 %
Interference frequency suppres- 55 Hz
sion
274
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Technical data
A.8 Technical data: LOGO! AM 2 PT100
LOGO! AM 2 PT100
Power supply
Input voltage
12/24 V DC
Permissible range
10.8 ... 28.8 V DC
Power consumption
25 ... 50 mA
Voltage failure buffering
typ. 5 ms
Power loss at
12 V
24 V
0.3 ... 0.6 W
Electrical isolation
No
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Ground terminal
for connecting ground and shielding of
the measuring line
0.6 ... 1.2 W
Sensor inputs
Number
2
Type
Resistive thermocouple Pt100
Connection of sensors
2-wire technique
3-wire technique
Yes
Measurement range
-50 °C ... +200 °C
Yes
–58 °F ... +392 °F
Settings for the measurement
display on the basic module:
1 °C steps
0.25 °C steps
(rounded to one decimal)
1 °C steps
0.25 °C steps
(rounded to one decimal)
Offset: –200, Gain: 25
Offset: –200, Gain: 250
Offset: –128, Gain: 45
Offset: –128, Gain: 450
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
275
Technical data
LOGO! AM 2 PT100
Curve linearization
No
Measuring current Ic
1.1 mA
Measurement rate
depends on the installation
typical: 50 ms
Resolution
0.25 °C
Error limits
of the final measured value:
0 °C ... +200 °C
-50 °C ... +200 °C
+/– 1.0 %
Electrical isolation
No
Cable length (shielded)
10 m
+/– 1.5 %
Interference frequency suppres- 55 Hz
sion
276
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Technical data
A.9 Technical data: LOGO!Power 12 V
LOGO! Power 12 V is a primary-switched power supply unit
for LOGO! devices. Two current ranges are available.
LOGO! Power
12 V / 1.9 A
LOGO! Power
12 V / 4.5 A
Input data
Input voltage
120 ... 230 V AC
Permissible range
85 ... 264 V AC
Permissible mains frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
Voltage failure buffering
> 40 ms (at 187 V AC)
Input current
0.3 ... 0.18 A
0.73 ... 0.43 A
Make current (25°C)
15 A
30 A
Device protection
Internal
Recommended circuit
breaker (IEC 898) in mains
line
> 6 A characteristic D
> 10 A characteristic C
Output data
Output voltage
12 V DC
Overall tolerance
+/–3 %
Adjustment range
11.1 ... 12.9 V DC
Residual ripple
< 200 mVpp
Output current
Overcurrent limiting
1.9 A
4.5 A
2.4 A
4.5 A
Efficiency
80 %
Parallel circuit for power increase
Yes
Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference suppression
EN 50081-1, EN 55022 Class B
Interference immunity
EN 50082-2
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
277
Technical data
LOGO! Power
12 V / 1.9 A
LOGO! Power
12 V / 4.5 A
Safety
Electrical isolation, primary/
secondary
Yes, SELV (to EN 60950/VDE 0805)
Safety class
II (to IEC 536/VDE 0106 T1)
Protection mode
IP 20 (to EN 60529/VDE 470 T1)
CE marking
Yes
UL/CSA certification
Yes; UL 508 / CSA 22.2
FM approval
In preparation
General details
Ambient temperature range
–20 ... +55°C, natural convection
Storage and shipping temperature
–40 ... +70°C
Connections at input
One terminal (1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2)
per L1 and N
Connections at output
Two terminals (1x.2.5 mm2 or
2 x 1.5 mm2) per L+ and M
Installation
On 35 mm DIN rail, snap-on
Dimensions in mm (WxHxD)
72 x 80 x 55
126 x 90 x 55
Approx. weight
0.2 kg
0.4 kg
278
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Technical data
A.10 Technical data: LOGO!Power 24 V
LOGO! Power 24 V is a primary-switched power supply
module for LOGO! devices. Two current ranges are available.
LOGO! Power
24 V / 1.3 A
LOGO! Power
24 V / 2.5 A
Input data
Input voltage
120 ... 230 V AC
Permissible range
85 ... 264 V AC
Permissible mains frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
Voltage failure buffering
40 ms (at 187 V AC)
Input current
0.48 ... 0.3 A
0.85 ... 0.5 A
Inrush current (25°C)
< 15 A
< 30 A
Device protection
Internal
Recommended circuit
breaker (IEC 898) in mains
line
> 6 A characteristic D
> 10 A characteristic C
Output data
Output voltage
24 V DC
Overall tolerance
+/- 3 %
Adjustment range
22.2 ... 25.8 V DC
Residual ripple
< 250 mVpp
Output current
Overcurrent limiting
1.3 A
2.5 A
1.6 A
2.8 A
Efficiency
> 80 %
Parallel circuit for power increase
Yes
Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference suppression
EN 50081-1, EN 55022 Class B
Interference immunity
EN 50082-2
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
279
Technical data
LOGO! Power
24 V / 1.3 A
LOGO! Power
24 V / 2.5 A
Safety
Electrical isolation, primary/
secondary
Yes, SELV (to EN 60950/VDE 0805)
Safety class
II (to IEC 536/VDE 0106 T1)
Protection mode
IP 20 (to EN 60529/VDE 470 T1)
CE marking
Yes
UL/CSA certification
Yes; UL 508 / CSA 22.2
FM approval
Yes; Class I, Div. 2, T4
General details
Ambient temperature range
–20 ... +55°C, natural convection
Storage and shipping temperature
–40 ... +70°C
Connections at input
One terminal (1 x. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2)
per L1 and N
Connections at output
Two terminals (1x.2.5 mm2
or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per L+ and M
Installation
On 35 mm DIN rail, snap-on
Dimensions in mm (WxHxD)
72 x 80 x 55
126 x 90 x 55
Approx. weight
0.2 kg
0.4 kg
280
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Technical data
A.11 Technical data: LOGO! Contact 24/230
LOGO! Contact 24 and LOGO! Contact 230 are switching
modules for direct switching of ohmic loads up to 20 Amps
and motors up to 4 kW (without noise emission, hum-free).
Operating voltage
LOGO!
Contact 24
LOGO!
Contact 230
24 V DC
230 V AC;
50/60 Hz
Switching capacity
Utilization category AC-1: Switching of
ohmic loads at 55°C
Operating current at 400 V
20 A
Output with three-phase loads at 400 V 13 kW
Utilization category AC-2, AC-3: Motor
with slip ring induction/cage armature
Operating current at 400 V
8.4 A
Output with three-phase loads at 400 V 4 kW
Short-circuit protection:
Assignment type 1
25 A
Assignment type 2
10 A
Connecting leads
Fine-wire with wire end ferrules
Solid wire
2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm2
2 x (1 to 2.5) mm2
1 x 4 mm2
Dimensions (WxHxD)
36 x 72 x 55
Ambient temperature
-25 ... +55°C
Storage temperature
-50 ... +80°C
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
281
Technical data
282
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
B Determining the cycle time
The program cycle is the complete execution of the circuit
program, that is, primarily the reading in of the inputs, the
processing of the circuit program and the subsequent reading out of the outputs. The cycle time is the time required to
execute a circuit program once in full.
The time required for a program cycle can be determined
using a short test program. This test program is created in
LOGO! and returns a value during its execution in parameter assignment mode from which the current cycle time is
derived.
Test program
1. Create the test program by linking an output to a threshold trigger and connecting the trigger input with an inverted flag.
B1
M1
Qx
Par
Output Qx or
other flag Mx
B2
1
M1
M1
2. Configure the threshold trigger as shown below. A pulse
is generated in each program cycle due to the inverted
flag. The trigger interval is set to 2 seconds.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
283
Determining the cycle
B1
1+
On =1000
Off=0000
Press B1
2
G_T=02:00s
3. Now start the circuit program and switch LOGO! to parameter assignment mode. In this mode, view the trigger
parameters.
B1
On =1000
Off =0000
fa =0086
fa= total of measured pulses per timeba
4. The reciprocal value of fa is equivalent to the LOGO!
execution time of the current circuit program in its memory.
1/fa = cycle time in s
Explanation
The inverted flag block changes its output signal at each
program execution. Thus, one logic level (high or low) width
is exactly equivalent to the length of one cycle. Hence, a
period lasts 2 cycles.
The threshold trigger indicates the ratio of periods per 2
seconds, which results in the ratio of cycles per second.
Edge transition of the inverted flag at
each circuit program execution
Cycle
time
1 period = 1 pulse = 2 cycles
Period
284
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
C LOGO! without display
Because some specific applications do not require operator
control and monitoring units such as buttons or a display,
we provide the LOGO! 12/24RCo, LOGO! 24o,
LOGO! 24RCo and LOGO! 230RCo versions without display.
View of a LOGO! 230RCo, for example:
L1 N I1 I2 I3 I4
I5 I6 I7 I8
RUN/STOP
1
Q1
2
1
Q2
2
1
Q3
2
1
Q4
2
Less is definitely more!
The versions without display offer you the following benefits:
Even more cost-effective without the operating element.
Requires less switch cabinet space than conventional
hardware.
Substantial benefits with regard to flexibility and prime
costs compared to stand-alone electronic switchgear.
Of advantage even for applications in which merely two
or three conventional switching devices can be replaced.
Very easy to use.
Access protected.
Compatible to LOGO! versions with display.
Offers the option to read data by means of LOGO!Soft
Comfort.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
285
LOGO! without display
Creating a circuit program without operator panel
There are two ways to create a circuit program for a LOGO!
without display:
You create the circuit program with LOGO!Soft Comfort
on your PC and then download it to the LOGO!
(see Chapter 7).
You download the circuit program from a LOGO! program module (card) to your LOGO! without display
(see Chapter 6).
Operating characteristics
LOGO! is ready for operation when power is switched on.
Switching off a LOGO! without display is equivalent to disconnecting the power supply, e.g. as if you were removing
the plug.
The circuit program of LOGO!...o versions can not be started or stopped by means of buttons. This is why the
LOGO!...o versions have other startup characteristics:
Startup characteristics
If there is no circuit program in the LOGO! or on the inserted program module (card), LOGO! remains in STOP.
If there is a valid circuit program in LOGO! memory, the
LOGO! automatically switches from STOP to RUN when
power is switched on.
The circuit program on an inserted program module (card)
is automatically copied to the LOGO!, immediately after
power is switched on. The existing circuit program in
LOGO! memory is overwritten. The system automatically
changes from STOP to RUN.
Provided the PC cable is connected to the LOGO!, you can
download the circuit program to LOGO! and start it by
means of the LOGO!Soft Comfort PC software
(see Chapter 7.1).
286
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
LOGO! without display
Operating status indication
Operating states, e.g. Power On, RUN and STOP are indicated by an LED on the front hood.
Red LED:
Power On/STOP
Green LED:
Power On/RUN
The red LED is lit after Power On and in all LOGO! states
other than RUN. The green LED is lit when LOGO! is in
RUN mode.
Reading current data
LOGO!Soft Comfort (see Chapter 7) provides an online test
for reading the current data of all functions while the system is in RUN.
If your LOGO! without display holds a protected program
module (card), you can not read the current data unless
you enter the correct password for your the circuit program.
The circuit program is otherwise deleted from LOGO! memory when you remove the program module (card) to connect the PC cable, for example (see Chapter 6.1).
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
287
LOGO! without display
288
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
D LOGO! menu structure
Menu overview
No Program
>Program..
Card..
Clock..
Start
No Program
Press ESC
Circuit program is
busy (RUN)
Mo 09:00
2003-01-27
See “Start menu“
See “Main menu”
>Stop
Set Param
Set Clock
Prg Name
Parameter assignment menu
>Yes
Parameter setting (Chapter 5.1.1 cont.)
Clock/date setting (Chapter 5.2)
Display of the program name
Main menu (ESC / >Stop)
>Stop/>Yes
>Program
Card
Clock
Start
See “Programming menu”
>Edit..
> –>Card See “Transfer menu”
>Set
See “Clock menu”
Clock
See “Start menu“
Mo 09:00
2003-01-27
Programming menu (ESC / >Stop
>Edit..
Editing the program
(Chapter 3.6 cont.)
>Edit Prg
Password?
>Edit Name
Editing the program
name (Chapter 3.6.4)
>Memory?
Show available memory
space (Chapter 3.7)
>Clear Prg
Deleting the program
(Chapter 3.6.11)
>Password
Input/change of password (Chapter 3.6.5)
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
>Program)
289
LOGO! Menu structure
Transfer menu (ESC / >Stop
>
>Card)
Copying the circuit program from LOGO!
to the program module (card) (Chapter 6.3)
–>Card
>Card–>
Copying the program from the program module (card) to LOGO! (Chapter 6.4)
>CopyProtect
Setting the program/copy protection
(Chapter 6.1)
Clock menu (ESC / >Stop
>Clock)
>Set Clock
Setting the time/date (Chapter 5.2)
>S/W Time
Setting the summertime/wintertime (Chapter 3.6.12)
>Sync
Synchronizing the times of LOGO! Basic
and expansion modules (Chapter 3.6.13)
Start menu (RUN)
Everything
clear?
LOGO!
Mo 09:00
2003–01–27
max. 10 message texts
I:
Q:
M:
0.. 123456789
0.. 123456789
0.. 123456789
1..0123456789
1..0123456
1..0123456789
2..01234
Date/time
Inputs
ESC+Key
2..01234
Outputs
Flags
Cursor keys
>Stop
Set Param
Set Clock
Prg Name
Parameter assignment menu
290
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
E Order numbers
Table A
Variant
Basic
Basic
without display
(pure)
Digital modules
Analog modules
Designation
Order number
LOGO! 12/24 RC *
6ED1052-1MD00-0BA4
LOGO! 24):
6ED1052-1CC00-0BA4
LOGO! 24 RC (AC)
6ED1052-1HB00-0BA4
LOGO! 230 RC
6ED1052-1FB00-0BA4
LOGO! 12/24 RCo *
6ED1052-2MD00-0BA4
LOGO! 24o *
6ED1052-2CC00-0BA4
LOGO! 24 RCo (AC)
6ED1052-2HB00-0BA4
LOGO! 230 RCo
6ED1052-2FB00-0BA4
LOGO! DM 8 12/24R
6ED1055-1MB00-0BA1
LOGO! DM 8 24
6ED1055-1CB00-0BA0
LOGO! DM 8 24R
6ED1055-1HB00-0BA0
LOGO! DM 8 230R
6ED1055-1FB00-0BA1
LOGO! AM 2
6ED1055-1MA00-0BA0
LOGO! AM 2 PT100
6ED1055-1MD00-0BA0
*: Also with analog inputs
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
291
Order numbers
Table B
Accessories
Software
Designation
Order number
LOGO!Soft Comfort V4.0
6ED1058-0BA00-0YA0
Upgrade to
LOGO!Soft Comfort V4.0
6ED1058-0CA00-0YE0
Program module (card)
LOGO! Card
6ED1056-5CA00-0BA0
Switching modules
LOGO!Contact 24 V
6ED1057–4CA00–0AA0
LOGO!Contact 230 V
6ED1057–4EA00–0AA0
Power modules
LOGO!Power 12V/1.9A
6EP1321–1SH01
LOGO!Power 12V/4.5A
6EP1322–1SH01
LOGO!Power 24V/1.3A
6EP1331–1SH01
LOGO!Power 24V/2.5A
6EP1332–1SH41
PC cable
6ED1057–1AA00–0BA0
Manual
6ED1050–1AA00–0BE5
Others
292
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
F Abbreviations
AM
B1
BN
C
CM
Cnt
Co
Dir
DM
En
Analog module
Block number B1
Block Number
LOGO! device designation: integrated clock
Communication Module
Count = Counter input
Connector
Direction (of count, for example)
Digital Module
Enable = switching on
(clock generators, for
example)
Fre Input for frequency signals to be analyzed
GF Basic Functions
Inv
Input for inverting the output signal
No
Cam (parameter of the timer)
o
in LOGO! designations: without display
Par Parameter
R
Reset input
R
in LOGO! designations: Relay outputs
Ral Reset all = Input for resetting all internal values
S
Set (latching relay, for example)
SF
Special functions
SU Subunit
T
Time = parameter
Trg Trigger (parameter)
0BA4 devices: the latest LOGO! Basic version, described in
this Manual.
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
293
Order numbers
294
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Index
A
Abbreviations, 293
AM. See Analog module
Amplifier, analog, 173
Analog
comparator, 165
values, 106
Analog amplifier, 173
Analog differential trigger, 161
Analog module, 2, 7
Analog threshold trigger, 158
BF, 89
Blank outputs, 40
blank outputs, 91
Block, 42
deleting, 74
block groups, 75
inserting, 69
number, 42
assigning, 43
BN, 89
C
Analog value monitoring, 170
Cap, 17
AND, 95
Card. See Program module
(card)
Applications, 221
AS interface, 2, 243
CE label, 10
Asynchronous pulse generator,
128
Character set, 60
Certification, 9
Circuit diagram, 45
B
Basic functions, 93
AND, 95
with edge, 96
NAND, 97
with edge, 98
NOR, 100
NOT, 101
OR, 99
XOR, 101
Basics on special functions, 102
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Circuit program, input, 54
circuit program, 84
deleting, 77
Circuit program name, assigning,
60
Circuit programs
archiving, 203
reproduce, 203
send by mail, 203
Closing the programming mode,
74
295
Index
CM. See Communications mo
dule
Co, 89, 90
Communication module, AS in
terface, 243
Communications module, 2
AS interface, 2, 7
Compatibility, Versions, 204
Connecting
Inputs, 25
outputs, 31
Cursor movement, 49
Cycle time, 283
D
Demo versions, 217
Device types, LOGO!, 2
Digital module, 2, 7
Dimensions, 16
DIN rail, 16
Connector, 17
Display, 43
Connectors, 39, 90
blank, 40
hi, 41
inputs, 41
lo, 41
LOGO!'s, 40
open, 92
outputs, 41
unused, 46
x, 40, 41, 46, 103
Display view, 43
Constants, 90
Control panel, 4, 5
Conversion, Summertime and
wintertime, 78
Correcting typing errors, 76
Counter
Operating hours, 150
Up/down, 146
CSA, 9
cULus , 9
Cursor, 49
Cursor keys, 40, 92, 184
296
Disposal, 10
DM. See Digital module
E
Earth connection, 24
Edge evaluation, 96, 98
Editing, 69
Example
Air-conditioning system, 234
Automatic door, 227
Factory door, 239
factory door
controlling, 243
Monitoring, 243
further options, 255
lighting
corridor, 223
stairway, 223
Luminous rows, 247
Service water pump, 251
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Index
exclusive OR, 101
Expansion modules, 2
Analog module, 2, 41
Communications module, 2
Digital module, 41
digital module, 2
Operating state, 36
expansion modules, 39
F
Flag blocks, 91
FM, 9
Four golden rules, 48
Function blocks, 42
Functions, 89
G
Gain, 106
GF, 93
Golden rules, 48
Guidelines, 11
H
Hiding, 72
I
Inputs, 90
Analog inputs, 27, 90
connection, 25
Cursor keys, 40, 92
Digital Inputs, 90
Groups, 25
inverting, 59, 93, 109
unused, 46
inputs, High-speed inputs, 27
Inserting, 69
Installation guidelines, 11
Interlock, 18, 20
Interpulse, width, 129
Inverter, 101
L
Latching relay, 175
LCD, 4, 5
LED, 287
Levels, 92
List
BF, 89
BN, 89
Co, 89, 90
SF, 89, 109
high-speed counting, 27
List , GF, 93
Hours counter, 150
Reading the MN and OT va
lues, 153
Logical inputs, 103
Hysteresis, 169
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Logic module, 1
LOGO!
connecting to PC, 218
297
Index
Guidelines, 11
identifying, 7
Installing, 16
Operating states, 36
removing, 16
Structure of, 4
switching on, 33
Versions, 8
wiring, 23
Mounting
DIN rail mounting, 17
Drilling template, 22
Wall-mounting, 21
Multiple function switch, 135
N
LOGO! menus, 50
Name, 60
LOGO! software, 215
NAND, 97
LOGO!Soft Comfort, 216
Negation, 101
of a BF input, 93
of an input, 59
of an SF input, 109
M
Memory
areas, 84
free, 88
limitation, 84
requirements, 85
space, 84
Menu structure, 289
Menus
Main menu, 50
Parameter assignment menu,
50
Programming menu, 50
Real-time clock menu, 50
Transfer menu, 50
Message texts, 179
Character set, 184
Mode
Parameter assignment, 194
parameter assignment, 50
PC-LOGO, 218
programming, 50
298
NOR , 100
NOT , 101
NOT AND, 97
NOT OR, 100
O
Off-delay, 117
Off-time, 140
Offset, 106
On-/Off-delay, 119
On-delay, 113
retentive, 121
On-time, 140
Open connectors, 92
Operating
characteristics, 286
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Index
Status indication, 287
Operating mode
Changing the operating mode,
48
Programming mode, 51
OR, 99
Order numbers, 291
Outputs, 90
Analog outputs, 91
blank, 40, 91
connecting, 31
Digital outputs, 90
P
Parameter, 196
'Set Param', 195
Inputs, 104
selecting, 197
setting, 193
T, 104
Parameter assignment, 71
Parameter assignment menu, 194
Parameter assignment screen
form, 139, 181
Parameter protection, 106
Parameters, modifying, 198
parameters, showing/hiding, 72
Password
assigning, 61
changing, 63
deactivating, 64
wrong, 65
PC cable, 218
USB, 218
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
PC-LOGO, 218
Planning, 49
Power
off, 34
On, 33
on, 34
switch, 33
Power supply, connecting, 23
Program memory, 84
Program chart, 44
Program cycle, 283
Program module (card)
'Card --> LOGO', 213
'CopyProtect', 206
'LOGO --> Card', 210
copying, 212
Enabling the security function,
207
inserting, 208, 209
removing, 208, 209
Security function, 205
Program name
change, 61
character set, 60
read, 195
Programs
'Clear Prg', 77
'Edit Name', 60
'Edit Prg', 52
'Password', 61
modifying, 68
Protection mode, 72
Pulse
Pause, 126
width, 126
width , 129
299
Index
pulse generator, Asynchronous ,
128
Pulse output, 123
Pulse relay, 176
R
Setup, 13
Maximum setup, 13
with different voltage classes,
14
SF, 89, 109
SFs, Delay, On, 113
Shift register, 190
Random generator, 130
Shift register bits, 40, 92
Recycling, 10
Showing, 72
Relay outputs, 31, 273
service life, 273
switching capacity, 273
Signal status transitions, 27
Removal, 19
Resources, 84
Retentive memory, 84
Retentive on-delay, 121
Retentivity, 105
enabling/disabling, Retentivity
setting, 72
Rules, Four golden, 48
RUN, 'Start', 66
S
Sensor Characteristics, 25
Sensor connections, 28
Set clock, 'Set Clock', 201
Setting, time, 72
Setting the date, 201
Setting the time-of-day, 201
'Set clock', 195
300
Simulation, 215
Size of a circuit, 84
Softkey, 186
Software, 215
Solid-state outputs, 32
Special functions, 109
Analog amplifier, 173
Analog Comparator, 165
Analog differential trigger, 161
Analog threshold trigger, 158
Analog value monitoring, 170
Basics, 102
Counter
Hours counter, 150
Up/down, 146
Delay
Off, 117
On/Off, 119
delay, ret. on, 121
Message texts, 179
Pulse generator, asynchronous,
128
Random generator, 130
Relay, Latch, 175
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Index
relay, Pulse, 176
Shift register, 190
Softkey, 186
Switch
Comfort, 135
Stairway lighting, 132
Threshold trigger, Frequency,
155
Timer
Week, 138
Year, 143
Trigger, Analog threshold, 158
Wiping relay
edge triggered, 125
Pulse output, 123
Stairway lighting switch, 132
Start, 66
Startup characteristics, 286
Startup flag, 92
Stop, 195
Subunits, 16
Summertime, 78
Summertime/Wintertime Con
version, 'S/W Time', 78
enabling, 83
T
T, Parameter, 105
Technical data, 259
general, 259
LOGO! 12..., 270
LOGO! 230...., 261
LOGO! 24/24o, 264
LOGO! 24RC/24RCo, 267
LOGO! AM 2 PT100, 275
LOGO! AM2, 274
LOGO! DM8 12/24R, 270
LOGO! DM8 230R, 261
LOGO! DM8 24, 264
LOGO! DM8 24R, 267
LOGO!Contact, 281
LOGO!Power 12 V, 277
Threshold trigger, Frequencies,
155
Time, Accuracy of, 104
Time response, 104
Timebase, 71, 104, 113
Summertime/wintertime conver
sion, 78
disabling, 82
enabling, 79
user-define parameters, 81
Timer, 1
accuracy, 105
Switch
Multiple function, 135
Stairway lighting, 132
trigger, Analog, Differential, 161
Timing inaccuracy , 105
Trigger, Analog threshold, 158
type of equipment, LOGO!, 2
Switched current, maximum, 32
Symbols, 7
Synchronization, 83
'Sync', 83
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
301
Index
U
Unused connectors, 46
unused connectors, 40
Unused inputs, 46
Up/down counter, 146
Update, 217
Upward compatibility, 204
USB, 218
V
Verification, 73
Voltage levels , 92
Voltage supply, connecting, Cir
cuit protection, 24
W
Weekday, 139
Weekly timer, 7, 140
Examples, 141
302
setting, 140
Weekly timer , 138
Wintertime, 78
Wiping relay
edge triggered, 125
Pulse output, 123
Wire ferrules, 23
without display, 285
creating a circuit program, 37
PC-LOGO mode, 218
reading current data, 287
X
XOR , 101
Y
Yearly timer, 143
Z
Zero offset, 106
LOGO! Manual
A5E00228550-01
Produktinformation
07.2004
Produktinformation zum Handbuch LOGO!; ab Ausgabe 06/2003
(A5E00228104-01)
Vorbemerkung
Diese Produktinformation enthält wichtige Informationen zu LOGO!
Sie ist als separater Bestandteil aufzufassen und in Zweifelsfällen in der Verbindlichkeit anderen Aussagen in Handbüchern und Katalogen übergeordnet.
Diese Produktinformation enthält die Ergänzungen für die LOGO!-Erweiterungsmodule DM16 24, DM16 24R und DM16 230R.
Copyright 2004 by Siemens AG
A5E00324307-01
1.1
Welche Erweiterungsmodule gibt es?
• LOGO! Digitalmodule DM8... gibt es für 12 V DC, 24 V AC/DC und
115...240 V AC/DC mit 4 Eingängen und 4 Ausgängen.
• LOGO! Digitalmodule DM16... gibt es für 24 V DC und 115...240 V AC/DC mit
8 Eingängen und 8 Ausgängen.
• LOGO! Analogmodule gibt es für 12 V DC und 24 V DC mit 2 Analogeingängen
bzw. mit 2 Pt100-Eingängen.
• LOGO! Kommunikationsmodule (CM), wie z.B. Kommunikationsmodul AS-Interface, das in einer eigenen Dokumentation beschrieben wird.
Digital- und Analogmodule sind in 2 bzw. 4 TE integriert und besitzen jeweils zwei Erweiterungsschnittstellen, so dass an jedes ein weiteres Modul angeschlossen sein
kann.
So ist LOGO! aufgebaut
2
7
7
8
6
L+ M I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
4
5
4
RUN/STOP
1
1
Q1
Q5
2 1
2 1
Q2
Q6
2
1
2
Q3
1
2 1
Q7
Q2
Q4
2 1
90
6
1
35
LOGO! Erweiterungsmodul
(z.B.: DM16 24R)
1.2
2
Q8
2
3
72
1
Spannungsversorgung
2
Eingänge
3
Ausgänge
53
4
Anzeige des Zustandes
RUN/STOP
7
Mechanische Codierung –
Stifte
5
Schieber
8
6
Erweiterungsschnittstelle
Mechanische Codierung –
Buchsen
Symbole
Digitalmodul verfügt über 4 Digitaleingänge und 4 Digitalausgänge
Digitalmodul verfügt über 8 Digitaleingänge und 8 Digitalausgänge
2
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
1.3
Erweiterungsmodule
An LOGO! können folgende Erweiterungsmodule angeschlossen werden:
Symbol
Bezeichnung
Versorgung
Eingänge
Ausgänge
LOGO! DM 8 12/24R
12/24 V DC
4 Digital
4 Relais je 5A
LOGO! DM 8 24
24 V DC
4 Digital
4 Transistor
24V / 0,3A
LOGO! DM 8 24R (3)
24 V AC/DC
4 Digital
4 Relais je 5A
LOGO! DM 8 230R
115...240 V AC/DC
4 Digital (1)
4 Relais je 5A
LOGO! DM 16 24
24 V DC
8 Digital
8 Transistor
24V / 0,3A
LOGO! DM 16 24R
24 V DC
8 Digital
8 Relais je 5A
LOGO! DM 16 230R
115...240 V AC/DC
8 Digital (4)
8 Relais je 5A
LOGO! AM 2
12/24 V DC
2 Analog
0 ... 10V oder
0 ... 20mA (2)
keine
LOGO! AM 2 PT100
12/24 V DC
2 Pt100
–50 °C bis
+200 °C
keine
(1): Keine unterschiedlichen Phasen innerhalb der Eingänge erlaubt.
(2): 0 ... 10V, 0 ... 20 mA sind wahlweise anschließbar.
(3): Digitaleingänge können wahlweise P-schaltend oder N-schaltend
betrieben werden.
(4): Eingänge in zwei Gruppen von 4. Innerhalb der Gruppe nur eine gleiche
Phase, zwischen den Gruppen verschiedene Phasen möglich.
1.4
Aufbau mit unterschiedlichen Spannungsklassen
Regeln
Digitalmodule können Sie nur an Geräte der gleichen Spannungsklasse anschließen.
Analogmodule und Kommunikationsmodule können Sie an Geräte mit beliebiger
Spannungsklasse anschließen.
Sie können ohne eine Änderung des Schaltprogramms zwei gleiche DM8-Erweiterungsmodule durch ein gleichartiges DM16-Erweiterungsmodul ersetzen (und umgekehrt).
Achtung
Zwei DM8 12/24R können nur bei einer Versorgungsspannung von 24 V DC gegen
ein DM16 24R getauscht werden.
Zwei DM8 24R können nur in der Betriebsart DC, P-schaltend gegen ein DM16 24R
getauscht werden.
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
3
Übersicht:
Erweiterungsmodul an LOGO! Basic anschließen
LOGO!
B i
Basic
Erweiterungsmodule
DM8 12/24R,
DM16 24R
DM8 24,
DM16 24
DM8 24R
DM8 230R,
DM16 230R
AM2,
AM2 PT100
CM
LOGO! 12/24RC
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24RC
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 230RC
–
–
–
x
x
x
LOGO! 12/24RCo
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24o
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24RCo
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 230RCo
–
–
–
x
x
x
Übersicht:
Erweiterungsmodul an Erweiterungsmodul anschließen
Erweiterungsmodul
d l
Weitere Erweiterungsmodule
DM8 12/24R,
DM16 24R
DM8 24,
DM16 24
DM 8 24R
DM8 230R,
DM16 230R
AM2,
AM2 PT100
CM
DM 8 12/24R,
DM 16 24R
x
x
x
–
x
x
DM 8 24,
DM 16 24
x
x
x
–
x
x
DM 8 24R
x
x
x
–
x
x
DM 8 230R,
DM 16 230R
–
–
–
x
x
x
AM2 / AM2 PT100
x
x
x
–
x
x
CM
x
x
x
–
x
x
4
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
1.5
Abmessungen
LOGO! besitzt die Abmessungen für Installationsgeräte gemäß DIN 43880.
LOGO! kann auf eine 35 mm breite Hutschiene nach DIN EN 50022 aufgeschnappt
oder an die Wand montiert werden.
Breite von LOGO!:
• LOGO! Basic ist 72 mm breit, das entspricht 4 Teilungseinheiten.
• LOGO! Erweiterungsmodule sind 36 mm bzw. 72 mm (DM16...) breit, das entspricht 2 bzw. 4 Teilungseinheiten.
1.6
Eingänge von LOGO! anschließen
Sensoreigenschaften für LOGO!
LOGO! DM16
24 R
LOGO! DM16
24
LOGO! DM16
230 R (AC)
LOGO! DM16
230 R (DC)
Schaltzustand 0
< 5 V DC
< 5 V DC
< 40 V AC
< 30 V DC
Eingangsstrom
< 1 mA
< 1 mA
< 0,05 mA
< 0,05 mA
Schaltzustand 1
> 12 V DC
> 12 V DC
> 79 V AC
> 79 V DC
Eingangsstrom
> 2 mA
> 2 mA
> 0,08 mA
> 0,08 mA
Achtung
Die Digitaleingänge der LOGO! 230 RC/RCo und des Erweiterungsmoduls
DM16 230R sind in zwei Gruppen aufgeteilt, die jeweils über 4 Eingänge verfügen.
Innerhalb einer Gruppe muss an allen Eingängen die gleiche Phase verwendet
werden. Verschiedene Phasen sind nur zwischen den Gruppen möglich.
Beispiel: I1 bis I4 an Phase L1, I5 bis I8 an Phase L2.
Bei LOGO! DM8 230R dürfen innerhalb der Eingänge keine unterschiedlichen
Phasen angeschlossen werden.
Sensoranschlüsse
Anschließen von Glimmlampen, 2-Draht-Näherungsschalter (Bero) an LOGO!
230RC/230RCo oder LOGO! DM8 230R (AC) und LOGO! DM16 230R (AC)
L1
N
Bestellbezeichnung für C:
Siemens
Schaltgeräte & Systeme
C
L1
3SB1420-3D
N
X-Kondensator 2,5 kV, 100 nF
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
5
1.7
Technische Daten
Allgemeine Technische Daten
Kriterium
Prüfung nach
Werte
LOGO!Basic
Abmessungen BxHxT
72 x 90 x 55 mm
Gewicht
ca. 190 g
Montage
auf Hutschiene 35 mm
4 Teilungseinheiten breit
oder Wandmontage
LOGO! Erweiterungsmodule
DM8..., AM...
Abmessungen BxHxT
36 x 90 x 53 mm
Gewicht
ca. 90 g
Montage
auf Hutschiene 35 mm
2 Teilungseinheiten breit
oder Wandmontage
LOGO! Erweiterungsmodule
DM16...
Abmessungen BxHxT
72 x 90 x 53 mm
Gewicht
ca. 190 g
Montage
auf Hutschiene 35 mm
4 Teilungseinheiten breit
oder Wandmontage
Klimatische Umgebungsbedingungen
Umgebungstemperatur
waagrechter Einbau
senkrechter Einbau
Kälte nach IEC
60068-2-1
Wärme nach
IEC 60068-2-2
IEC 60068-2-30
Luftdruck
Schadstoffe
0 ... 55 °C
-40 °C ... +70 °C
Lagerung / Transport
Relative Feuchte
0 ... 55 °C
C
von 10 bis 95%
keine Betauung
795 ... 1080 hPa
IEC 60068-2-42
SO2 10 cm3 /m3, 4 Tage
IEC 60068-2-43
H2S 1 cm3 /m3, 4 Tage
Mechanische Umgebungsbedingungen
Schutzart
Schwingungen
IP 20
IEC 60068-2-6
5 ... 9 Hz (konstante Amplitude 3,5 mm)
9 ... 150 Hz (konstante Beschleunigung 1 g)
Schock
IEC 60068-2-27
18 Schocks
(Halbsinus 15g/11ms)
Kippfallen
IEC 60068-2-31
Fallhöhe 50 mm
Freier Fall, verpackt
IEC 60068-2-32
1m
6
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
Kriterium
Prüfung nach
Werte
Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit (EMV)
Störaussendung
EN 55011/A
EN 55022/B
Grenzwertklasse B Gruppe 1
EN 50081-1
(Wohnbereich)
Elektrostatische Entladung
IEC 61000-4-2
8 kV Luftentladung
Schärfegrad 3
6 kV Kontaktentladung
Elektromagnetische Felder
IEC 61000-4-3
Feldstärke 10 V/m
HF-Bestromung auf Leitungen und
Leitungsschirmen
IEC 61000-4-6
10 V
Burst Impulse
IEC 61000-4-4
2 kV (Versorgungs- und Signalleitungen)
Schärfegrad 3
Energiereicher Einzelimpuls
(Surge)
IEC 61000-4-5
Schärfegrad 3
(nur bei LOGO! 230....)
1 kV (Versorgungsleitungen)
symmetrisch
2 kV (Versorgungsleitungen)
asymmetrisch
Angaben über IEC- / VDE-Sicherheit
Bemessung der Luft- u. Kriechstrecken
IEC 60664,
IEC 61131-2, EN 50178
cULus nach UL 508,
CSA C22.2 No. 142
Bei LOGO! 230R/RC
auch VDE 0631
erfüllt
Isolationsfestigkeit
IEC 61131-2
erfüllt
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
7
Technische Daten: LOGO! DM16 230R
LOGO! DM16 230R
Stromversorgung
Eingangsspannung
115 ... 240 V AC/DC
Zulässiger Bereich
85 ... 265 V AC
100 ... 253 V DC
Zulässige Netzfrequenz:
47 ... 63 Hz
Stromaufnahme
•
•
•
•
115 V AC
10 ... 60 mA
240 V AC
10 ... 40 mA
115 V DC
5 ... 25 mA
240 V DC
5 ... 20 mA
Spannnungsausfallüberbrückung
• 115 V AC/DC
• 240 V AC/DC
typ
typ.
yp 10 ms
typ.
typ 20 ms
Verlustleistung bei
•
•
•
•
115 V AC
1,1
, ... 4,5
, W
240 V AC
2,4
, ... 5,5
, W
115 V DC
0,6 ... 2,9 W
240 V DC
1,2 ... 4,8 W
Pufferung der Uhr bei 25 _C
Ganggenauigkeit der Echtzeituhr
Digitaleingänge
Anzahl
8
Potentialtrennung
nein
Eingangsspannung L1
•
•
•
•
Signal 0
< 40 V AC
Signal 1
> 79 V AC
Signal 0
< 30 V DC
Signal 1
> 79 V DC
Eingangsstrom bei
• Signal
g
0
• Signal 1
< 0,05 mA
> 0,08 mA
Verzögerungszeit bei
• 0 nach 1
• 1 nach 0
typ.
yp 50 ms
Leitungslänge (ungeschirmt)
100 m
typ. 50 ms
Digitalausgänge
Anzahl
8
Typ der Ausgänge
Relaisausgänge
Potentialtrennung
ja
in Gruppen zu
1
Ansteuerung eines Digitaleingangs
ja
8
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
LOGO! DM16 230R
Dauerstrom Ith
max. 5 A je Relais
Glühlampenlast (25.000 Schaltspiele) bei
230/240 V AC
1000 W
115/120 V AC
500 W
Leuchtstoffröhren mit elektr. Vorschaltgerät (25.000
Schaltspiele)
10 x 58 W (bei 230/240 V AC)
Leuchtstoffröhren konventionell kompensiert (25.000
Schaltspiele)
1 x 58 W (bei 230/240 V AC)
Leuchtstoffröhren unkompensiert (25.000 Schaltspiele)
10 x 58 W (bei 230/240 V AC)
Kurzschlussfest cos 1
Leistungsschutz B16
600A
Kurzschlussfest cos 0.5 bis 0.7
Leistungsschutz B16
900A
Derating
kein; im gesamten Temperaturbereich
Parallelschaltung von Ausgängen zur Leistungserhöhung
nicht zulässig
Absicherung eines Ausgangsrelais (falls gewünscht)
max. 16 A,
Charakteristik B16
Schaltfrequenz
mechanisch
10 Hz
Ohmsche Last/Lampenlast
2 Hz
Induktive Last
0,5 Hz
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
9
Technische Daten: LOGO! DM16 24
LOGO! DM16 24
Stromversorgung
Eingangsspannung
24 V DC
Zulässiger Bereich
20,4 ... 28,8 V DC
Verpolschutz
ja
Zulässige Netzfrequenz
Stromaufnahme aus 24 V
30 ... 45 mA
0,3 A je Ausgang
Spannnungsausfallüberbrückung
Verlustleistung bei 24 V
0,8 ... 1,7 W
Pufferung der Uhr bei 25 _C
Ganggenauigkeit der Echtzeituhr
Digitaleingänge
Anzahl
8
Potentialtrennung
nein
Eingangsspannung
L+
• Signal
g
0
• Signal 1
< 5 V DC
> 12 V DC
Eingangsstrom bei
• Signal
g
0
• Signal 1
< 1 mA
> 2 mA
Verzögerungszeit bei
• 0 nach 1
• 1 nach 0
typ.
yp 1,5 ms
Leitungslänge (ungeschirmt)
100 m
typ. 1,5 ms
Digitalausgänge
Anzahl
8
Typ der Ausgänge
Transistor,
P-schaltend
Potentialtrennung
nein
in Gruppen zu
Ansteuerung eines Digitaleingangs
ja
Ausgangsspannung
¢ Versorgungsspannung
Ausgangsstrom
max. 0,3 A
Dauerstrom Ith
Glühlampenlast (25.000 Schaltspiele) bei
Leuchtstoffröhren mit elektr. Vorschaltgerät (25.000
Schaltspiele)
Leuchtstoffröhren konventionell kompensiert (25.000
Schaltspiele)
Leuchtstoffröhren unkompensiert (25.000 Schaltspiele)
10
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
LOGO! DM16 24
Kurzschlussfest und überlastsicher
ja
Kurzschlussstrombegrenzung
ca. 1 A
Derating
kein; im gesamten Temperaturbereich
Kurzschlussfest cos 1
Kurzschlussfest cos 0.5 bis 0.7
Parallelschaltung von Ausgängen zur Leistungserhöhung
nicht zulässig
Absicherung eines Ausgangsrelais (falls gewünscht)
Schaltfrequenz
mechanisch
elektrisch
10 Hz
Ohmsche Last/Lampenlast
10 Hz
Induktive Last
0,5 Hz
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
11
Technische Daten: LOGO! DM16 24R
LOGO! DM16 24R
Stromversorgung
Eingangsspannung
24 V DC
Zulässiger Bereich
20,4 ... 28,8 V DC
Verpolschutz
ja
Stromaufnahme
• 24 V DC
30 ... 90 mA
Spannnungsausfallüberbrückung
• 24 V DC
typ. 5 ms
Verlustleistung
• 24 V DC
0,7 ... 2,5 W
Pufferung der Uhr bei 25 _C
Ganggenauigkeit der Echtzeituhr
Potentialtrennung
nein
Digitaleingänge
Anzahl
8
Potentialtrennung
nein
Eingangsspannung L+
• Signal
g
0
• Signal 1
< 5 V DC
> 12 V DC
Eingangsstrom bei
• Signal
g
0
• Signal 1
< 1 mA
> 2 mA
Verzögerungszeit bei
• 0 nach 1
• 1 nach 0
typ.
yp 1,5 ms
Leitungslänge (ungeschirmt)
100 m
typ. 1,5 ms
Digitalausgänge
Anzahl
8
Typ der Ausgänge
Relaisausgänge
Potentialtrennung
ja
in Gruppen zu
1
Ansteuerung eines Digitaleingangs
ja
Ausgangsspannung
Ausgangsstrom
Dauerstrom Ith (je Klemme)
max. 5 A je Relais
Glühlampenlast (25.000 Schaltspiele)
1000 W
Leuchtstoffröhren mit elektr. Vorschaltgerät (25.000
Schaltspiele)
10 x 58 W
Leuchtstoffröhren konventionell kompensiert (25.000
Schaltspiele)
1 x 58 W
12
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
LOGO! DM16 24R
Leuchtstoffröhren unkompensiert (25.000 Schaltspiele)
10 x 58 W
Kurzschlussfest und überlastsicher
Kurzschlussstrombegrenzung
Derating
kein; im gesamten Temperaturbereich
Kurzschlussfest cos 1
Leistungsschutz B16
600A
Kurzschlussfest cos 0.5 bis 0.7
Leistungsschutz B16
900A
Parallelschaltung von Ausgängen zur Leistungserhöhung
nicht zulässig
Absicherung eines Ausgangsrelais (falls gewünscht)
max. 16 A,
Charakteristik B16
Schaltfrequenz
mechanisch
10 Hz
elektrisch
Ohmsche Last/Lampenlast
2 Hz
Induktive Last
0,5 Hz
1.8
Bestellnummern
Tabelle A
Variante
Basic
Basic
ohne Display
(Pure)
Digitalmodule
Analogmodule
Bezeichnung
Bestellnummer
LOGO! 12/24RC *
6ED1 052-1MD00-0BA4
LOGO! 24 *
6ED1 052-1CC00-0BA4
LOGO! 24RC (AC)
6ED1 052-1HB00-0BA4
LOGO! 230RC
6ED1 052-1FB00-0BA4
LOGO! 12/24RCo *
6ED1 052-2MD00-0BA4
LOGO! 24o *
6ED1 052-2CC00-0BA4
LOGO! 24RCo (AC)
6ED1 052-2HB00-0BA4
LOGO! 230RCo
6ED1 052-2FB00-0BA4
LOGO! DM 8 12/24R
6ED1 055-1MB00-0BA1
LOGO! DM 8 24
6ED1 055-1CB00-0BA0
LOGO! DM 8 24R
6ED1 055-1HB00-0BA0
LOGO! DM 8 230R
6ED1 055-1FB00-0BA1
LOGO! DM 16 24
6ED1055-1CB10-0BA0
LOGO! DM 16 24R
6ED1055-1NB10-0BA0
LOGO! DM 16 230R
6ED1055-1FB10-0BA0
LOGO! AM 2
6ED1 055-1MA00-0BA0
LOGO! AM 2 PT100
6ED1 055-1MD00-0BA0
*: zusätzlich mit Analogeingängen
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
13
Bestellnummern
14
Produktinformation LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
Product information
07.2004
Product Information on Manual LOGO!; from Edition 06/2003
(A5E00228550-01)
Preliminary remarks
This Product Information contains additional information about LOGO!
It is a separate component and should be considered more up-to-date than the
information in the manuals and catalogs if uncertainties arise.
This Product Information provides information about LOGO! expansion modules
DM16 24, DM16 24R and DM16 230R.
Copyright 2004 by Siemens AG
A5E00324307-01
2.1
Which expansion modules are available?
• LOGO! digital modules DM8... are available for operation with 12 V DC, 24 V
AC/DC and 115...240 V AC/DC, and are equipped with four inputs and four
outputs.
• LOGO! digital modules DM16... are available for operation with 24 V DC and
115...240 V AC/DC, and are equipped with eight inputs and eight outputs.
• LOGO! analog modules are available for operation with
12 V DC and 24 V DC, and are equipped with two analog inputs or two Pt100
inputs.
• LOGO! communications modules (CM), for example the communications
module AS interface, that is described in a separate documentation.
The digital/analog modules are integrated in two or four subunits. Each one is
equipped with two expansion interfaces for connecting additional modules.
2.2
The LOGO! structure
8
6
L+ M I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
4
5
4
RUN/STOP
1
1
Q1
Q5
2 1
2 1
Q2
Q6
2
1
2
Q3
1
2 1
Q7
Q2
Q4
2 1
90
6
1
7
35
LOGO! expansion module
(e.g.: DM16 24R)
2
7
2
Q8
2
3
72
1
Power supply
2
Inputs
3
Outputs
53
4
RUN/STOP indicator
7
Mechanical coding
pins
5
Slide
8
6
Expansion interface
Mechanical coding
sockets
Symbols
The digital module is equipped with 4 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs
The digital module is equipped with 8 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs
16
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
2.3
Expansion modules
The following expansion modules can be connected to the LOGO!:
Symbol
Name
Power supply
Inputs
Outputs
LOGO! DM 8 12/24R
12/24 V DC
4 digital
4 relays (5A)
LOGO! DM 8 24
24 V DC
4 digital
4 solid state
24V / 0.3A
LOGO! DM 8 24R (3)
24 V AC/DC
4 digital
4 relays (5A)
LOGO! DM 8 230R
115...240 V AC/DC
4 digital (1)
4 relays (5A)
LOGO! DM 16 24
24 V DC
8 digital
8 solid state
24V / 0.3A
LOGO! DM 16 24R
24 V DC
8 digital
8 relays (5A)
LOGO! DM 16 230R
115...240 V AC/DC
8 digital (4)
8 relays (5A)
LOGO! AM 2
12/24 V DC
2 analog
0 ... 10V or 0
... 20mA (2)
none
LOGO! AM 2 PT100
12/24 V DC
2 Pt100
–50 °C to
+200 °C
none
(1): Different phases are not allowed within the inputs.
(2): 0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA can be connected optionally.
(3): Digital inputs can be operated either with P or with N action.
(4): Two groups consisting of 4 inputs each. Each group must be connected to
the same phase. It is possible to interconnect groups with a different phase.
2.4
Setup with different voltage classes
Rules
Digital modules can only be connected to devices of the same voltage class.
You may connect analog and communications modules to devices of any voltage
class.
You may replace two similar DM8 expansion modules by one appropriate DM16 expansion module (and vice versa) without having to change the circuit program.
Note
Two DM8 12/24R may be replaced by one DM16 24R only if operated with a power
supply of 24 V DC.
Two DM8 24R may be replaced by one DM16 24R only if operated with DC and
P action.
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
17
Overview:
Connecting an expansion module to LOGO! Basic
LOGO!
B i
Basic
Expansion modules
DM8 12/24R,
DM16 24R
DM8 24,
DM16 24
DM8 24R
DM8 230R,
DM16 230R
AM2,
AM2 PT100
CM
LOGO! 12/24RC
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24RC
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 230RC
–
–
–
x
x
x
LOGO! 12/24RCo
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24o
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 24RCo
x
x
x
–
x
x
LOGO! 230RCo
–
–
–
x
x
x
Overview:
Connecting a further expansion module to an expansion module
Expansion
module
d l
Further Expansion modules
DM8 12/24R,
DM16 24R
DM8 24,
DM16 24
DM 8 24R
DM8 230R,
DM16 230R
AM2,
AM2 PT100
CM
DM 8 12/24R,
DM 16 24R
x
x
x
–
x
x
DM 8 24,
DM 16 24
x
x
x
–
x
x
DM 8 24R
x
x
x
–
x
x
DM 8 230R,
DM 16 230R
–
–
–
x
x
x
AM2 / AM2 PT100
x
x
x
–
x
x
CM
x
x
x
–
x
x
18
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
2.5
Dimensions
The LOGO! installation dimensions are compliant with DIN 43880.
LOGO! can be snap-mounted to 35 mm DIN rails to EN 50022 or on the wall.
LOGO! width:
• LOGO! Basic has a width of 72 mm, which corresponds with 4 subunits.
• LOGO! expansion modules have a width of 36 mm or 72 mm (DM16...), which corresponds with 2 or 4 subunits.
2.6
Connecting LOGO! inputs
Sensor characteristics for LOGO!
LOGO! DM16
24 R
LOGO! DM16
24
LOGO! DM16
230 R (AC)
LOGO! DM16
230 R (DC)
Signal status 0
< 5 V DC
< 5 V DC
< 40 V AC
< 30 V DC
Input current
< 1 mA
< 1 mA
< 0.05 mA
< 0.05 mA
Signal status 1
> 12 V DC
> 12 V DC
> 79 V AC
> 79 V DC
Input current
> 2 mA
> 2 mA
> 0.08 mA
> 0.08 mA
Note
The digital inputs of LOGO! 230 RC/RCo and of expansion module DM16 230R are
divided into two groups, each consisting of four inputs. Within the same group, all
inputs must be operated on the same phase. Different phases are only possible
between the groups.
Example: I1 to I4 on phase L1, I5 to I8 on phase L2.
Inputs within the LOGO! DM8 230R may not be connected to different phases.
Sensor connections
Connecting glow lamps and 2-wire proximity switches (Bero) to LOGO!
230 RC/230 RCo or LOGO! DM8 230 R (AC) and LOGO! DM16 230R (AC)
L1
N
Order number for C:
Siemens
Switchgear & Systems
C
L1
3SB1420-3D
N
X-capacitor 2.5 kV, 100 nF
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
19
2.7
Technical data
General technical data
Criterion
Tested in accordance
with
LOGO!Basic
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
Values
72 x 90 x 55 mm
Approx. 190 g
Installation
on a 35 mm profile rail
4 module widths
or wall mounting
LOGO! expansion modules
DM8..., AM...
Dimensions (WxHxD)
36 x 90 x 53 mm
Weight
Approx. 90 g
Installation
on a 35 mm profile rail
2 module widths
or wall mounting
LOGO! expansion modules
DM16...
Dimensions (WxHxD)
72 x 90 x 53 mm
Weight
Approx. 190 g
Installation
on a 35 mm profile rail
4 module widths
or wall mounting
Climatic conditions
Ambient temperature
Horizontal installation
Vertical installation
Low temperature to IEC
60068-2-1
60068
21
High temperature to
IEC 60068-2-2
-40 °C ... +70 °C
Storage/shipping
Relative humidity
Air pressure
Pollutants
0 ... 55 °C
C
0 ... 55 °C
IEC 60068-2-30
IEC 60068-2-42
IEC 60068-2-43
From 10 to 95 %
no condensation
795 ... 1080 hPa
SO2 10 cm3 /m3, 4 days
H2S 1 cm3 /m3, 4 days
Ambient mechanical conditions
Protection mode
IP20
Vibrations:
IEC 60068-2-6
Shock
IEC 60068-2-27
Drop
IEC 60068-2-31
5 ... 9 Hz (constant amplitude
3.5 mm)
9 ... 150 Hz (constant acceleration 1 g)
18 shocks
(half-sine wave 15g/11 ms)
Drop height 50 mm
Free fall (packaged)
IEC 60068-2-32
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
1m
Noise emission
Limit class B group 1
20
EN 55011/A
EN 55022/B
EN 50081-1
(domestic area)
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
Criterion
Tested in accordance
with
IEC 61000-4-2
Severity 3
IEC 61000-4-3
8 kV air discharge
6 kV contact discharge
Field strength 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-6
10 V
IEC 61000-4-4
Severity 3
IEC 61000-4-5
Severity 3
2 kV (supply and signal lines)
Clearance and creepage distance
rating
IEC 60664,
IEC 61131-2, EN 50178
cULus to UL 508, CSA
C22.2 No. 142
With LOGO!
230 R/RC,
also VDE 0631
Fulfilled
Insulation strength
IEC 61131-2
Fulfilled
Electrostatic discharge
Electromagnetic fields
HF currents on cables and cable
shielding
Burst pulses
High-energy surge pulse
(applies only to
LOGO! 230 ...)
Values
1 kV (power lines)
symmetrical
2 kV (power lines)
asymmetrical
Safety to IEC / VDE
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
21
Technical data: LOGO! DM16 230R
LOGO! DM16 230R
Power supply
Input voltage
115 ... 240 V AC/DC
Permissible range
85 ... 265 V AC
100 ... 253 V DC
Permissible mains frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
Power consumption
•
•
•
•
115 V AC
10 ... 60 mA
240 V AC
10 ... 40 mA
115 V DC
5 ... 25 mA
240 V DC
5 ... 20 mA
Voltage failure buffering
• 115 V AC/DC
• 240 V AC/DC
typ
typ.
yp 10 ms
typ.
typ 20 ms
Power loss at
•
•
•
•
115 V AC
1.1 ... 4.5 W
240 V AC
2.4 ... 5.5 W
115 V DC
0.6 ... 2.9 W
240 V DC
1.2 ... 4.8 W
Backup of the real-time clock at 25 _C
Accuracy of the real-time clock
Digital inputs
Number
8
Electrical isolation
No
Input voltage L1
•
•
•
•
Signal 0
< 40 V AC
Signal 1
> 79 V AC
Signal 0
< 30 V DC
Signal 1
> 79 V DC
Input current at
• Signal
g
0
• Signal 1
< 0.05 mA
> 0.08 mA
Delay time at
• 0 to 1
• 1 to 0
typ.
yp 50 ms
Line length (unshielded)
100 m
typ. 50 ms
Digital outputs
Number
8
Output type
Relay outputs
Electrical isolation
Yes
In groups of
1
Control of a digital input
Yes
22
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
LOGO! DM16 230R
Continuous current Ith
max. 5 A per relay
Incandescent lamp load (25000 switching cycles) at
230/240 V AC
1000 W
115/120 V AC
500 W
Fluorescent tubes with ballast (25000 switching
cycles)
10 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)
Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated
(25000 switching cycles)
1 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)
Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000 switching cycles)
10 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)
Short circuit-proof cos 1
Power protection B16
600A
Short-circuit proof cos
0.5 to 0.7
Power protection B16
900A
Derating
None; across the entire temperature
range
Parallel output circuits for power increase
Not permitted
Protection of output relay
(if desired)
max. 16 A,
characteristic B16
Switching rate
Mechanical
10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load
2 Hz
Inductive load
0.5 Hz
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
23
Technical data: LOGO! DM16 24
LOGO! DM16 24
Power supply
Input voltage
24 V DC
Permissible range
20.4 ... 28.8 V DC
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Permissible mains frequency
Power consumption from 24 V DC
30 ... 45 mA
0.3 A per output
Voltage failure buffering
Power loss at 24 V
0.8 ... 1.7 W
Backup of the real-time clock at 25 _C
Accuracy of the real-time clock
Digital inputs
Number
8
Electrical isolation
No
Input voltage
L+
• Signal
g
0
• Signal 1
< 5 V DC
> 12 V DC
Input current at
• Signal
g
0
• Signal 1
< 1 mA
> 2 mA
Delay time at
• 0 to 1
• 1 to 0
typ.
yp 1.5 ms
Line length (unshielded)
100 m
typ. 1.5 ms
Digital outputs
Number
8
Output type
Transistor,
current-sourcing
Electrical isolation
No
In groups of
Control of a digital input
Yes
Output voltage
¢ Supply voltage
Output current
max. 0.3 A
Continuous current Ith
Incandescent lamp load (25000 switching cycles) at
Fluorescent tubes with ballast (25000 switching
cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated
(25000 switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000
switching cycles)
24
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
LOGO! DM16 24
Short circuit-proof and overload-proof
Yes
Short-circuit current limitation
Approx. 1 A
Derating
None; across the entire temperature
range
Short circuit-proof cos 1
Short-circuit proof cos 0.5 to 0.7
Parallel output circuit for power increase
Not permitted
Protection of output relay (if desired)
Switching rate
Mechanical
Electrical
10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load
10 Hz
Inductive load
0.5 Hz
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
25
Technical data: LOGO! DM16 24R
LOGO! DM16 24R
Power supply
Input voltage
24 V DC
Permissible range
20.4 ... 28.8 V DC
Reverse polarity protection
Yes
Power consumption from 24 V DC
30 ... 90 mA
Voltage failure buffering
• 24 V DC
typ. 5 ms
Power loss at 24 V
• 24 V DC
0.7 ... 2.5 W
Backup of the real-time clock at 25 _C
Accuracy of the real-time clock
Electrical isolation
No
Digital inputs
Number
8
Electrical isolation
No
Input voltage
• Signal
g
0
• Signal 1
< 5 V DC
> 12 V DC
Input current at
• Signal
g
0
• Signal 1
< 1 mA
> 2 mA
Delay time at
• 0 to 1
• 1 to 0
typ.
yp 1.5 ms
Line length (unshielded)
100 m
typ. 1.5 ms
Digital outputs
Number
8
Output type
Relay outputs
Electrical isolation
Yes
In groups of
1
Control of a digital input
Yes
Output voltage
Output current
Continuous current Ith
max. 5 A per relay
Incandescent lamp load (25000 switching cycles) at
1000 W
Fluorescent tubes with ballast (25000 switching
cycles)
10 x 58 W
Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated
(25000 switching cycles)
1 x 58 W
26
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
LOGO! DM16 24R
Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000
switching cycles)
10 x 58 W
Short circuit-proof and overload-proof
Short-circuit current limitation
Derating
None; across the entire temperature
range
Short circuit-proof cos 1
Power protection B16
600A
Short-circuit proof cos 0.5 to 0.7
Power protection B16
900A
Parallel output circuit for power increase
Not permitted
Protection of output relay (if desired)
max. 16 A,
characteristic B16
Switching rate
Mechanical
10 Hz
Electrical
Ohmic load/lamp load
2 Hz
Inductive load
0.5 Hz
2.8
Order numbers
Table A
Variant
Basic
Basic
without display
(pure)
Digital modules
Analog modules
Designation
Order number
LOGO! 12/24RC *
6ED1 052-1MD00-0BA4
LOGO! 24 *
6ED1 052-1CC00-0BA4
LOGO! 24RC (AC)
6ED1 052-1HB00-0BA4
LOGO! 230RC
6ED1 052-1FB00-0BA4
LOGO! 12/24RCo *
6ED1 052-2MD00-0BA4
LOGO! 24o *
6ED1 052-2CC00-0BA4
LOGO! 24RCo (AC)
6ED1 052-2HB00-0BA4
LOGO! 230RCo
6ED1 052-2FB00-0BA4
LOGO! DM 8 12/24R
6ED1 055-1MB00-0BA1
LOGO! DM 8 24
6ED1 055-1CB00-0BA0
LOGO! DM 8 24R
6ED1 055-1HB00-0BA0
LOGO! DM 8 230R
6ED1 055-1FB00-0BA1
LOGO! DM 16 24
6ED1055-1CB10-0BA0
LOGO! DM 16 24R
6ED1055-1NB10-0BA0
LOGO! DM 16 230R
6ED1055-1FB10-0BA0
LOGO! AM 2
6ED1 055-1MA00-0BA0
LOGO! AM 2 PT100
6ED1 055-1MD00-0BA0
*: Also with analog inputs
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
27
Bestellnummern
28
Product information LOGO!
A5E00324307-01
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement